JP7366780B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

Conventional gaming machines can execute a battle effect and a timer effect at the same time as a reach effect, and during a battle effect, it is also possible to execute a slow motion effect that slows down the playback speed of the battle effect. There are some (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-99801

However, in Patent Document 1, if the playback speed of the battle effect is slowed down as a slow motion effect, the progress speed of the timer effect also becomes slow, giving the player a sense of discomfort. be.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Sound output means (for example, the voice synthesis IC079SG132, voice data ROM079SG133, and amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L, 8R and the voice control board 13),
Display means (for example, image display device 5);
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
Light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
Equipped with
The performance execution means is configured to display a specific display performance (for example, a pending display, an active display) that corresponds to the variable display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize). a part in which the display is displayed in any one of display patterns α to display patterns γ), and a specific light emitting effect (for example, a flash when winning a prize) in which the light emitting means emits light based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a winning start). performance), a specific performance that is different from the specific display performance and the specific light emission performance and that suggests that the control will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach performance), and an information performance that operates information display regarding the game. (for example, a caption), and
The specific performance is
The display means displays a performance video, the sound output means outputs performance sound, and the light emitting means emits light,
The first period (for example, as shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, the first half execution period of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect) and the corresponding The second period after the first period (for example, as shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, execution of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect) period), and a third period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25) that is a period after the second period and that notifies either an advantageous mode or a disadvantageous mode as a production result. , including a jackpot notification performance execution period and a loss notification performance execution period),
The performance execution means is
In the first period, it is possible to display the effect animation in a presentation mode that progresses at a first speed (for example, normal progress speed V1) (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, During the execution period of the first half of each of the 1st reach performance, the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In the second period, it is possible to display the performance video in a performance mode that progresses at a second speed that is slower than the first speed (for example, a progression speed V2 (slow motion) that is slower than the normal progression speed V1);
In both the first period and the second period, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the light emitting means, and in the second period, the light emitting means may be emitted at shorter intervals than in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode (for example, as shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect) (a portion where the video of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed of V2 during the partial execution period),
In the first period and the second period, the operation speed of the information display in the information presentation is not changed,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g. winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g. main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body). lamp 9d);
The first light emitting means is configured to emit light for a first predetermined period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). and a second predetermined period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness that does not change during the execution period of the previous prize-winning flash performance). (The part that blinks at C1 and cycle T1, and during the flash performance execution period at the time of late prize winning, blinks at brightness C2 and cycle T2),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner according to the specific light emitting effect during the first predetermined period, and emits light in a manner according to the variable display being executed during the second predetermined period (for example, in FIG. As shown in -28, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d flash at a brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, and flash at the time of winning in the second period. During the performance execution period, the part that flashes at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0),
The performance execution means may execute a first specific display performance, in which a time period from the establishment of the predetermined condition to the completion of the display of the specific display is a first time (for example, after a starting winning occurs) as the specific display performance. Specific display display start effect A) in which the period until the appearance animation of the pending display (active display) ends is 0.2 seconds, and the time from the establishment of the predetermined condition to the completion of the display of the specific display is as described above. A second specific display effect that is a second time that is longer than the first time (for example, a specific display that has a period of 1.2 seconds from when a starting winning occurs until the appearance animation of the pending display (active display) ends) It is possible to execute display start effect B),
The degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is different depending on when the first specific display effect is executed and when the second specific display effect is executed (for example, FIGS. 11-17);
It is characterized by
The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video;
A performance execution means (for example, Production control CPU 120),
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
Equipped with
The production sound corresponding to the predetermined production includes music and sound effects (for example, a portion where BGM (music) and sound effects can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R),
The display means is capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a pending display and an active display) corresponding to the variable display,
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
A specific display effect that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a part that displays a pending display or an active display in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ) ), and a specific light emitting effect (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize) that causes the light emitting means to emit light,
In the specific display effect, the specific light emission effect is executed so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed (for example, FIG. 11-28, FIG. 11- As shown in 29(A) to FIG. 11-32(H) and FIG. 11-49(A) to FIG. 11-50(D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts before the pending display is completed. (the part that lights up),
The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emitting effect is executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-24, when the winning flash effect is executed, (If the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning, the percentage of control to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed)
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g. winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g. main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body). lamp 9d);
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous period winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous period winning flash effect); A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness of C1 and (The part that blinks at cycle T1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the brightness is C2 and blinks at cycle T2),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner that corresponds to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner that corresponds to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, in FIG. 11-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d flash at a brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. During the period, the part that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, the game can be made more interesting by producing sound including music and sound effects. In addition, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and in the first period of the specific light emission effect, By causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, it is possible to make the specific light emitting effect more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for players to recognize.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (entering the starting area of the game ball) as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2016-105941, identification based on the establishment of the predetermined condition has been performed. In addition to displaying a display (holding display or active display) on the display means, a pre-read notice indicating that the variable display will be controlled in an advantageous state before the start of the variable display is executed for the variable display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. It is possible to do so, and there is one in which a pre-read notice (specific light emission effect) can be executed by causing a light emitting means to emit light. However, in such gaming machines, depending on the timing at which the display of the specific display starts and the timing at which the specific light emission effect starts, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. In view of this, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that allows players to easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display and active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A specific display effect that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a part that displays a pending display or an active display in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ) ), and a specific light emitting effect (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect executing means executes the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIG. -28, as shown in Figures 11-29 (A) to 11-32 (H), and Figures 11-49 (A) to 11-50 (D), before the display of the pending display is completed. The part that lights up the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning a prize),
The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emitting effect is executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-24, when the winning flash effect is executed, (If the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning, the percentage of control to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed)
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g. winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g. main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body). lamp 9d);
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous period winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous period winning flash effect); A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness of C1 and (The part that blinks at cycle T1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the brightness is C2 and blinks at cycle T2),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner that corresponds to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner that corresponds to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIG. 11-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d flash at a brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. During the period, the part that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect In this case, the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous by causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the specific display.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing rotating display of a hold display in each hold display area, and (C) is a diagram showing moving display of a subtitle in a subtitle display area. , (D) is a diagram showing the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of a chance up effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns for still image display performance, and (B) is a diagram showing the performance contents of each performance pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns of operation promotion performance, and (B) is a diagram showing the performance contents of each performance pattern. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)3. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 1st reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 1st reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 3rd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 3rd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production in a modification. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control data holding area, (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning, and (C) is the configuration of the active display buffer. It is a figure which shows an example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of winning random value determination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern and the presence or absence of execution of the pending display notice effect as a pre-read notice. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of a specific display display start effect execution process. It is a diagram showing a performance mode of a specific display display start performance A. It is a figure which shows the performance mode of specific display display start performance B. It is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process. It is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing presentation modes of a flash effect at the time of winning in the first period and a flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. (A) is a front view of the pachinko game machine with the game effect lamp lit at high brightness (C1), and (B) is a front view of the pachinko game machine with the game effect lamp turned off. be. A front view of the pachinko gaming machine in a state where the game effect lamp is lit at low brightness (C2) and a pachinko game machine showing the transition of the light emission mode of the game effect lamp when the game effect lamp is lit at low brightness. FIG. When a starting winning that is eligible for the winning flash effect occurs, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp, and the starting gate lamp, and the timing of displaying the effect image and silhouette image. FIG. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. In the case of a starting winning that is subject to the winning flash effect in the modified example, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp, and the starting gate lamp, and the display of the effect image and silhouette image. 3 is a timing chart showing the timing of . It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a timing chart showing the timing of the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp, and the starting port lamp, the display of the effect image and the silhouette image, and the operation of the movable body in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. It is a timing chart showing the timing of displaying a flash lamp and a silhouette image at the time of winning in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. They are a timing chart showing the timing of the operation of the winning flash lamp and the movable body in a modified example, and a diagram showing the determination ratio of the timing at which the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp changes. It is a figure which shows the display mode of a hold display and an active display in a modification, the suggestion content of each display mode, and the selection ratio at the time of the winning slash effect execution decision. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating presentation modes in a hold display and an active display when a winning flash effect is executed in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating presentation modes in a hold display and an active display when a winning flash effect is executed in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating presentation modes in a hold display and an active display when a winning flash effect is executed in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A form for implementing a pachinko gaming machine, which is a gaming machine according to the present invention, will be described below based on an example.

[form]
Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video,
A performance execution means (for example, Production control CPU 120),
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM and sound effects are output at the normal playback speed of V4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
The sound output means includes a reproduction circuit that reproduces sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis), an amplifier circuit that amplifies the sound reproduced by the reproduction circuit (for example, amplifier circuit 079SG134), and a sound that is amplified by the amplifier circuit. The device is characterized in that it includes speakers (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that output sound.
According to this feature, highly reproducible performance sound can be output from the speaker at an appropriate volume.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 1 or Form 2,
The performance execution means is capable of outputting a speed related to a performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance at the same speed as in the first period during a predetermined period in the second period, and In a specific period after the period, the sound output means can output at a speed different from the first period (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the second reach effect, etc.) can be output at a speed different from the first period. In the first half of the second half execution period of each reach performance of the 3rd reach performance and the 4th reach performance, the speaker is used as in the first half execution period of each reach performance of the 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance. While the production sound is output from 8L and 8R at the playback speed V4, in the second half of the execution period of the second half of each reach production of the 1st reach production, 2nd reach production, 3rd reach production, and 4th reach production, the playback speed is V4. (For example, the part where the production sound is output at a playback speed different from the playback speed V4 (for example, playback speed V5 slower than V4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the speed of the effect sound can be made different for a specific period within the second period in which the effect video is displayed at the second speed, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
The production sound corresponding to the predetermined production includes music and sound effects (for example, a portion where BGM (music) and sound effects can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R).
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the game's interest through the performance sound including music and sound effects.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 4,
comprising a light emitting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9) capable of emitting light and changing the light emission mode at least in the first period and the second period;
The effect executing means is capable of changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in the second period at a shorter period than the first period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, As shown in 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and the second half of the fourth reach performance, each execution period of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance and the fourth reach performance (The part where the game effect lamp 9 flashes at a shorter cycle than the execution period of the first half of the reach effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the change cycle of the light emitting mode of the light emitting means becomes shorter (faster) in the second period when the speed of progress of the performance is slow, thereby improving the performance effect of the second period.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 5,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner and capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
The display areas that can display the effect animation include a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2(A)) and a second display area that is closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
A predetermined effect (e.g., reach effect) in which an effect animation of a character is displayed in the first display area and an effect sound is outputted by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the effect animation of the character; Information display that operates the information display related to the variable display (for example, rotating display of the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SG005D and the second pending storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2(B), 2(C); moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
Regarding the information presentation, it is possible to perform an information presentation in which the information display operates at the same operating speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIGS. 10-19 to 10- 25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect, the rotating display of the hold display is rotated at the rotation speed V3. , the part where the movement of the caption is displayed at the movement speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, but the operating speed of the information display and the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance change between the first period and the second period. Since it does not change from period to period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine described in Form 6,
The total area of the first display area is larger than the total area of the second display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the area of the second display area 079SG005Sa). (a portion wider than the combined area of the area and the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to more easily recognize the predetermined presentation than the information presentation, thereby improving the player's enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine described in Form 6 or Form 7,
The effect execution means is capable of executing an information effect in which the information display always operates at the same operating speed during at least a variable display period other than the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. -18 to Figure 10-25, during the period other than during the reach effect, the rotating display of the pending display is executed at rotation speed V3 in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop In display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the caption is executed at movement speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the operating speed of information display does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 6 to 8,
The information presentation includes a moving display presentation that sequentially moves and displays information indicating the state of the presentation in the variable display being executed in the second display area (for example, a moving display of a message according to the gaming state in the telop display area 079SG005T). ),
The effect execution means is capable of executing a moving display effect that moves and displays the information display so that at least a part of the information display is always visible to the player (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-2(C)). As shown, the characters included in the message in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and end the display, and at the same time they are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T and move to the left again. (the part that is moved towards the right)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since at least a part of the information display is always visible to the player, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the moving display effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, an amplifier circuit 079SG134) mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13;
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video;
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that a privilege will be given by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. ), and a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification performance (for example, a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance) that informs whether or not a privilege will be awarded after the execution of the predetermined performance. ,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
Within the second period, it is possible to perform an effect production that is different from the predetermined production and that enhances the production effect of the predetermined production (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and As shown in 10-28, the part that executes the effect production of displaying concentrated lines on the image display device 5 during the second half execution period of the second reach effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, to enhance the performance effect of the second period, and to make the players aware that the second period has ended and the notification performance will be executed through the effect performance. It's easy to do.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to Form 10,
The performance execution means is
The effect production may be performed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of effectiveness for enhancing the production effect of the predetermined production (for example, a mode in which concentrated lines are displayed as shown in FIG. 10-28(C), and a mode as shown in FIG. 10-28(D)). As shown in FIG.
As the second period progresses from the start point to the end point, it is possible to execute the effect production in a manner in which the degree of effectiveness of enhancing the production effect increases sequentially (for example, FIG. 10-28(C) and FIG. 10-28( As shown in D), the number of concentrated lines increases as the battle performance progresses)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the mode of the effect production changes to a mode in which the degree of effectiveness of increasing the production effect of the predetermined production increases sequentially, the effect production indicates that the notification production will be executed at the end of the second period. This makes it easier for people to recognize the information.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 11,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner and capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
The display areas that can display the effect animation include a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2(A)) and a second display area that is closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect), a notification effect that informs whether or not a benefit will be awarded after execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a jackpot notification effect and a loss notification effect), and specific information related to the variable display in the second display area. Effects (for example, rotating display of the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SG005D and second pending storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2(B), or in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C)) a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a moving display of a subtitle;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video whose performance progresses at a first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, During the execution period of the first half of each of the 1st reach performance, the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of each of the 1st reach effect, 2nd reach effect, 3rd reach effect, and 4th reach effect, the progress speed of the video of each reach effect is (portion displayed on the image display device 5 at V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
The notification effect can be executed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, FIG. 10-26(G), FIG. 10-29(E), FIG. 10-30(D), As shown in FIG. 10-31 (G) and FIG. 10-35 (C), when the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination as a jackpot notification effect, the jackpot is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. (The part that displays the image of the notification effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, by executing the notification effect in a wide display area that combines the first display area and the second display area, it is possible to notify the player that a privilege has been awarded. It can be easily recognized by players.

Form 13 is the gaming machine according to form 12,
The performance execution means is
A first display that operates within the second display area (for example, a hold display) and a second display that does not operate within the second display area (for example, a first hold storage display area 079SG005D and a second hold storage display area 079SG005U) ) can be displayed in the specific information presentation,
The notification effect can be executed in the second display area where the first display and the second display are erased (for example, FIG. 10-26(G), FIG. 10-29(E), FIG. 10-30 As shown in (D), Figure 10-31 (G), and Figure 10-35 (C), when executing the jackpot notification effect, the hold display, the first hold memory display area 079SG005D, and the second hold memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification effect is executed in the second display area where not only the first display that operates but also the second display that does not operate is erased, thereby further increasing the visibility of the notification effect in the second display area. be able to.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 13,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner and capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
As display areas that can display the effect animation, a first display area (for example, first display area 079SG005F), a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, second display area 079SG005Sa), A display means (for example, image display device 5) including
A benefit granting means (for example, the CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach performance), a notification performance that notifies whether or not a benefit will be awarded after execution of the predetermined performance (for example, a jackpot notification performance and a miss notification performance), and an information performance related to variable display in the second display area. (For example, the rotating display of the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SG005D and the second pending storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2(B), or the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C) A production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120) that can execute
Equipped with
The display means can change the visibility of the first display area and the second display area (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-2, in addition to the first display area 079SG005F, the second display area a portion that can reduce the visibility of the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb),
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video whose performance progresses at a first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, During the execution period of the first half of each of the 1st reach performance, the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of each of the 1st reach effect, 2nd reach effect, 3rd reach effect, and 4th reach effect, the progress speed of the video of each reach effect is (portion displayed on the image display device 5 at V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
During the pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined performance to the execution of the notification performance, the visibility of the first display area changes, but the visibility of the second display area does not change (for example, modification 079SG -2, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, by changing the visibility of the first display area during the pre-notification period, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the timing at which the notification effect is executed. Since the visibility of the second display area does not change, it is also possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation.

Form 15 is the gaming machine according to form 14,
The display means is a means capable of generating an image to be displayed, and includes a first drawing layer (for example, second image data) capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the first display area, and a first drawing layer from the first drawing layer. is an upper drawing layer, and includes a second drawing layer (e.g., first image data) capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the second display area. control unit 123);
The visibility of the first display area is changed by changing the visibility of the image drawn by the image generation means in the first drawing layer (for example, as shown in Modification 079SG-2, the visibility of the image drawn in the first drawing layer is changed by the second image data (a portion that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea that is drawn as an image)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, only the visibility of the first display area can be accurately changed without changing the visibility of the second display area.

Form 16 is the gaming machine according to Form 15,
The image generation means adjusts the visibility of the image to be drawn in the first drawing hierarchy from a specific position away from an area corresponding to the second display area in the first drawing hierarchy to an area corresponding to the second display area. (For example, as shown in modification example 079SG-2, the effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as the image of the second image data is moved from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa. (The part that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by drawing in an enlarged manner toward the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the first drawing layer changes over a predetermined period from a specific position to an area corresponding to the second display area. The visibility of the area can be made difficult to change.

Form 17 is a gaming machine according to any one of Forms 14 to 16,
Equipped with a motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player,
The performance execution means is
The notification effect can be executed based on the detection of the player's movement by the movement detection means (for example, the jackpot game state is controlled based on the player's operation of the push button 31B, or the jackpot game (a part that can notify that it is not controlled by the state),
It is possible to execute a motion promotion performance (for example, an operation promotion performance) that prompts a player to perform a motion by displaying a motion promotion image in the first display area for executing the notification performance;
Although the visibility of the performance video of the predetermined performance decreases, the visibility of the action promotion performance does not decrease (for example, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F decreases due to the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F decreases, but The visibility of the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and meter 079SG005M displayed as data images does not decrease)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the motion promotion performance stand out from the predetermined performance, so that it is possible to effectively encourage the player to perform the motion.

Form 18 is a gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 17,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner and capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
The display areas that can display the effect animation include a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2(A)) and a second display area that is closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, reach effect), an information effect that notifies whether or not a benefit will be awarded after the end of the predetermined effect, and an information effect that operates an information display related to the variable display in the second display area (for example, FIG. 10- Rotating display of the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SG005D and second pending storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 2(B), and moving display of the subtitle in the subtitle display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C)) A possible production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video whose performance progresses at a first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, During the execution period of the first half of each of the 1st reach performance, the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of each of the 1st reach effect, 2nd reach effect, 3rd reach effect, and 4th reach effect, the progress speed of the video of each reach effect is (portion displayed on the image display device 5 at V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
A pre-notification performance that displays a specific still image corresponding to a stoppage of the progress of the predetermined performance being executed in the first display area during a pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined performance to the execution of the notification performance. (For example, still image display effect)
The information display operation in the second display area continues even during the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21, even during the still image display effect execution period, the first pending operation continues). (The part where the rotating display of the pending display in the storage display area 079SG005D and the second pending storage display area 079SG005U and the moving display of the subtitle in the subtitle display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C) continue)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, by displaying the specific still image in the first display area during the pre-notification period, the player can recognize that the notification effect will be executed. In addition, since the information display operation in the second display area continues, it is possible to prevent the information presentation from becoming difficult to recognize due to the information display operation stopping.

Form 19 is the gaming machine according to Form 18,
The specific still image is an image obtained by changing the color of the still image of the predetermined effect whose progress has been stopped (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-16 and 10-29(A) to 10-29(B)). As shown, the color of the still image is inverted when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific still image displayed in the first display area has a different color from the still image of the predetermined effect, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the notification effect is being executed.

Form 20 is the gaming machine according to form 19,
Regarding the image of the information effect displayed in the second display area, the color does not change during the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), the still image display effect is pattern SG- 2, the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted, but the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and the color of the still image displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are inverted. (The color of the 4th pattern is not reversed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the pre-announcement effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information effect (the color of the image of the information effect does not change, so if the color changes (This makes it easier to recognize that it is a specific still image.)

Form 21 is a gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 20,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
A display means capable of displaying a directed video (for example, an image display device 5),
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that a privilege will be given by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. ), and a performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification performance (for example, a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance) that informs whether or not a privilege will be awarded after the execution of the predetermined performance.
Equipped with
The predetermined performance includes a first section (for example, a first reach performance and a third reach performance) and a second section after the first section (for example, a second reach performance and a fourth reach performance),
The first section and the second section each refer to the first period (for example, the first half execution period of the first reach effect, the first half execution period of the second reach effect, the first half execution period of the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect). (first half performance period) and a second period after the first period (for example, first reach performance second half execution period, second reach performance second half execution period, third reach performance second half execution period, fourth reach performance second half execution period) including the second half of the reach performance (execution period),
The performance execution means is
In the first period, it is possible to display on the display means an effect video in which the progress speed of the effect is a first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach effect, the first reach effect, etc. During the execution period of the first half of each of the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In the second period, it is possible to display on the display means an effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is at a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25). , a portion where the video of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. ),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
A first pattern in which the predetermined effect is transferred to the second section after execution of the first section (for example, the variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21, or the variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25) and a second pattern that ends without moving to the second section after executing the first section (for example, the super reach shown in FIGS. 10-18 and 10-19). It is characterized in that it can be executed by variable display of α1 and super reach α2, and variable display of super reach β1 and super reach β2 shown in FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23).
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, the predetermined effect can be executed at the second speed in the first section and then move to the second section, or the predetermined effect can be executed without moving to the second section. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the game ends and whether or not the predetermined performance is executed at the second speed in the second section and a privilege is awarded, the game enjoyment can be improved.

Form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
The performance execution means is
A termination suggestion effect that suggests that the predetermined effect ends in the first section without moving to the second section (for example, when an ally character is defeated by an enemy character).
The end suggestion effect and the predetermined effect when transitioning from the first section to the second section can be executed at the same progress speed (for example, Fig. 10-19, Fig. 10-20, Fig. 10-21 , as shown in FIGS. 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance and the second half of the third reach performance, the production in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and the first (a part in which the second half of the reach performance execution period or the second half execution period of the third reach performance is executed at the progress speed V1),
When notifying that a privilege will be given in the notification performance, it is possible to display a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is at a third speed in the first notification period of the notification performance on the display means, and In a second notification period that is later than the first notification period, an effect video having a fourth speed slower than the third speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 10-18, FIG. 10-20, FIG. -22, Figure 10-24, Figure 10-25, Figure 10-26 (E) to Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (C) to Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 ( B) ~ Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) ~ Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) ~ Figure 10-35 (C), as shown in The part that displays the video when the enemy character collapses due to the attack being hit at the progress speed V2),
When notifying that no benefits will be given in the notification performance, the performance video at the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the performance video at the fourth speed during the second notification period. (For example, Figure 10-19, Figure 10-21, Figure 10-23, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-27 (E) to Figure 10-27 (G), Figure 10-30 (F) to Figure 10 -30 (H), Figures 10-32 (E) to 10-32 (G), and Figures 10-35 (D) to 10-35 (F), the videos of when an ally character collapses. (The part where the display is executed at the progress speed V1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the progressing speed of the predetermined performance when moving to the second section is the same as the progressing speed of the end-suggesting performance, the progressing speed when moving to the second section is the same as the progressing speed of the end-suggesting performance. By being different, it is possible to prevent expectations for the award of the benefit from becoming excessively high, and when it is announced that the benefit will not be awarded, the 4th speed performance video will not be displayed. It is also possible to prevent the player's dissatisfaction from increasing excessively, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 22,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video,
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
a motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that a privilege will be given by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. ), a movement promotion effect (for example, operation promotion effect) that encourages the player to perform a movement, and a notification effect (for example, , a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
When the performance video of the predetermined performance is being displayed at the second speed in the second period, the movement promotion performance can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, 4. The part where the operation promotion performance is executed when the video display of the reach performance is being executed at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of the reach performance)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, since the predetermined presentation progresses at the second speed while the movement promotion presentation is being executed during the second period, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the predetermined presentation. can.

The gaming machine of Form 24 is the gaming machine according to Form 23,
The movement promotion effect includes a valid detection period notification effect (for example, a display of a meter 079SG005M indicating an operation inheritance period of the push button 31B) for notifying a valid detection period during which the detection of the player's movement by the movement detection means is accepted. ,
When the effective detection period ends, the performance execution means detects a movement of the player by the movement detection means within the effective detection period from a timing later than the end of the effective detection period. It is possible to perform the same notification effect as in the case of push (The part that executes the same jackpot notification performance or loss notification performance based on the end of the operation reception period for the button 31B or the player's operation of the push button 31B)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, if the motion detection means does not detect the player's motion, the notification effect will not be executed before the effective detection period has elapsed, so the motion detection means will detect the player's motion. By not doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of whether or not the benefit will be awarded during the validity detection period.

The gaming machine of Form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 24,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video;
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that a privilege will be given by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. ), a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification performance (for example, a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance) that informs whether or not a privilege will be awarded after the end of the predetermined performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
When notifying that a privilege will be given in the notification performance, it is possible to display a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is at a third speed in the first notification period of the notification performance on the display means, and In a second notification period that is later than the first notification period, an effect video having a fourth speed slower than the third speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 10-18, FIG. 10-20, FIG. -22, Figure 10-24 and Figure 10-26 (E) to Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (C) to Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (B) to Figure 10 -30(D), Figures 10-31(E) to 10-31(G), and Figures 10-35(A) to 10-35C), in the jackpot notification performance, the attack of an ally character The part of the video where the character hits the enemy character is displayed at a progressing speed of V1, while the part of the video where the enemy character falls is displayed at a progressing speed of V2).
When notifying that no benefits will be given in the notification performance, the performance video at the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the performance video at the fourth speed during the second notification period. (For example, Figure 10-19, Figure 10-21, Figure 10-23, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-27 (E) to Figure 10-27 (G), Figure 10-30 (F) to Figure 10 As shown in -30 (H), Figures 10-32 (E) to 10-32 (G), and Figures 10-35 (D) to 10-35 (F), the video of the failure notification effect is moving at the same speed as the progress speed. (Part displayed in V1)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, when the award of a benefit is announced as a notification effect, a performance video with the progress speed at the fourth speed is displayed, so that the benefit is awarded. It is possible to impress on the player what has been done by the performance video of the notification performance.

The gaming machine of Form 26 is the gaming machine according to Form 25,
The effect executing means executes a special effect (for example, a still image display effect in which the color of the still image is inverted (pattern SG-16) as shown in FIG. 10-16) during the second period only when a privilege is given. A game machine characterized by being capable of performing the still image display effect (2)).
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the special effect will be executed.

The gaming machine of Form 27 is the gaming machine according to Form 26,
The benefit granting means provides a first benefit (for example, a jackpot game state with a non-probability variable jackpot) and a second benefit (for example, a jackpot game state with a probability variable jackpot) that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit. It is possible to grant
The performance execution means is capable of executing a special performance (for example, a revival performance shown in Modified Example 079SG-4) that notifies that a benefit will be provided after once notifying that the benefit will not be provided in the notification performance. ,
When the special performance is executed during the second period and the notification performance informs that a benefit will be awarded, the second benefit is awarded (for example, as shown in Modification 079SG-4, When the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 and the jackpot notification effect is executed, the part that is controlled to a jackpot game state with a probability variable jackpot),
When the special performance is performed during the second period and after the notification performance informs that no benefits will be awarded, the first benefit or the second benefit is granted. (For example, as shown in modification 079SG-4, if the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the failure notification effect is executed once, and then the resurrection effect is executed, the jackpot is a non-probable variable jackpot. (Some parts are controlled in a gaming state and others are controlled in a jackpot gaming state with a probability of variable jackpot.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, after the special performance is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the award of a benefit will be announced in the notification performance, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 28 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 27,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video;
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
a motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that a privilege will be given by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. ), a first movement promotion image (for example, operation promotion image 079SG005Ba), and a second movement promotion image different from the first movement promotion image (for example, operation promotion image 079SG005Bb). A movement promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion effect) that displays on the display means to encourage the player to perform a movement, and a judgment as to whether or not a privilege is given based on the detection of the player's movement by the movement detection means. A performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification performance to be notified (for example, a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
The operation promotion effect can be executed after the start of the second period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, the operation promotion effect is executed during the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect) part),
When performing the movement promotion effect using the first movement promotion image, the first movement promotion image is displayed while visually displaying the effect animation of the predetermined effect on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-33). As shown, when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed, the effect image 079SG005E having transparency is also displayed, so the player can see the battle performance through the effect image 079SG005E).
When performing the movement promotion effect using the second movement promotion image, the display means displays the effect animation of the predetermined effect in a manner that makes it more difficult to see than the first movement promotion image. , the second operation promotion image is displayed in a display area wider than the display area of the first operation promotion image (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-34, operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is larger in size than operation promotion image 079SG005Ba). When displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, the transparency of the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is 0%, so the visibility of the battle performance is lower than when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed),
The rate at which benefits are given when the second operation promotion image is displayed is higher than when the first operation promotion image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, when the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb The rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when is displayed is lower than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the first movement promotion image and the second movement promotion image is displayed as the movement promotion effect. You can improve your interest in gaming.

The gaming machine of Form 29 is the gaming machine according to Form 28,
The effect execution means is capable of displaying an effect animation of the predetermined effect whose progress speed is the second speed on the display means while the first motion promotion image is being displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, FIG. 10-25 and FIGS. 10-33(C) to 10-33(E), when displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba as the operation promotion effect, while the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed, the battle effect (The part where the display of the production video is executed at the progress speed V2)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, since the performance moving image of the predetermined performance is displayed at the second speed while the first action promotion image is being displayed, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 29,
The performance execution means is
As the predetermined effects, a first predetermined effect (for example, a first reach effect and a third reach effect) and a second predetermined effect (for example, a second reach effect and a fourth reach effect) can be performed, and the first After the execution of the first specific section (for example, the first half execution period of the first reach effect and the first half execution period of the third reach effect) in the predetermined effect, the second specific section after the first specific section (for example, the first reach effect) is executed. It is possible to transition to the second half of the performance period and the second half of the third reach performance),
A first specific pattern (for example, super reach α1 shown in FIG. 10-18) in which the predetermined effect is notified of the granting of a benefit without moving to the second specific section after the first specific section of the first predetermined effect is executed. and a variable display of super reach β1 shown in FIG. , the variable display of the super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 and the super reach β3 shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25), the first specific section of the first predetermined effect and the first A third specific pattern (for example, the variable display of super reach α2 shown in FIG. 10-19 or the variable display of super reach β2 shown in FIG. 10-23) that ends the predetermined effect after execution with the second specific section, is feasible and
both when transitioning from the first specific section of the first predetermined performance to the second specific section and when transitioning from the second specific section of the first predetermined performance to the second predetermined performance. A performance video whose progress speed is the second speed is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, from the execution period of the first half of the first reach performance to the second half of the first reach performance) When transitioning to the execution period, When transitioning from the first half of the first reach performance to the first half of the second reach performance, When transitioning from the first half of the third reach performance to the second half of the third reach performance , when transitioning from the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the first half of the fourth reach performance, the performance video of each reach performance is executed at the progress speed V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound is output at the same speed in both the first specific section and the second specific section of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect. (For example, as shown in Figures 10-18 to 10-25, when transitioning from the first half execution period of the first reach effect to the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second half execution period of the first reach effect changes When transitioning to the execution period of the first half of the reach performance, When transitioning from the execution period of the first half of the third reach performance to the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance, From the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the execution period of the first half of the fourth reach performance (The part where BGM and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R at playback speed V4, same as in other periods)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes when transitioning from the first specific section to the second specific section of the first predetermined performance, and when transitioning from the second specific section to the second predetermined performance. However, since the output speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change when transitioning from the first specific section of the first predetermined performance to the second specific section or from the second specific section to the second predetermined performance, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, by changing the progressing speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance to the second speed, the player can easily recognize the branching of the predetermined performance.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, control may be made to change the probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot," a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 079SG)
Next, the feature section 079SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 079SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the audio control board 13 in the feature section 079SG has an audio synthesis board that works together with the performance control CPU 120 to generate sounds (performance sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is equipped with an IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 that amplifies the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and an audio data ROM079SG133. Based on the production control command, the sound number data is output to the voice synthesis IC079SG132, and the voice synthesis IC079SG132 generates a sound corresponding to the sound number data.

When sound number data is input from the performance control CPU 120, the sound synthesis IC079SG132 generates sounds and sound effects for each of the speakers 8L and 8R individually according to the input sound number data, and sends them to the amplifier circuit 079SG134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesis IC079SG132, and outputs the amplified sound to each speaker 8L and 8R.

The audio data ROM079SG133 stores control data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R for outputting a sound corresponding to the performance executed by the performance command to which the sound number data corresponds in association with the sound number data. . In other words, these control data include the output mode (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sounds such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from each speaker 8L and 8R during the performance period (for example, decorative pattern variable display period). is a collection of data including audio data etc. described in chronological order.

FIG. 10-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the feature section 079. The display area of the image display device 5 in the feature portion 079SG is formed into a rectangular shape with a height L and a width L from side to side when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decorative symbols, a ready-to-reach effect, an operation promotion effect described later, and a still image display effect. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reservation storage display area 079SG005D in which the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed by the number of reservation displays in an outlined circle, and a second reservation storage number of special symbols can be displayed in white. A second display area 079SG005Sa is configured including a second hold storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed depending on the number of circular hold displays, and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop that indicates the gaming status.

That is, a portion of the entire display area of the image display device 5 excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

Note that the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb display game-related information (pending display, telop display, fourth symbol This is the display area where the number of reserved memories is displayed. In other words, the second display area 079SG005Sa and third display area 079SG005Sb in the feature section 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 displays a fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first special symbol pending memory number, and a display of the second special symbol pending memory number. 3 display area 079SG005Sb.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The horizontal width is formed to have the same length as the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. Further, the third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and horizontal width are extremely shorter than the height H and the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. There is.

Therefore, in this feature section 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F occupying the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. .

As shown in FIG. 10-2(B), in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, the performance control CPU 120 executes a pending display operation process (see FIG. 8-13), which will be described later. As a result, each pending display can be displayed rotating around the vertical axis at a constant speed (for example, rotational speed V3).

As shown in FIG. 10-2(C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the performance control CPU 120 executes the telop operation process (see FIG. 10-13), which will be described later, so that the telop display area 079SG005T changes according to the gaming state and the performance being executed. A message (for example, if a specific reach effect is in progress, a message according to the state of the effect such as "In XX mode!") is moved from the left to the right at a constant speed (for example, movement speed V3). It can be displayed simultaneously.

Furthermore, when the characters included in the message according to the gaming state reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and the display ends, they are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T, and are moved from the left to the right again. be moved in a direction. Therefore, when a message corresponding to the gaming state is being moved and displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message corresponding to the gaming state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can It is now easier to recognize the current gaming status.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, a form is provided in which the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display in the first hold memory display area 079SG005D and the second hold memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are at different constant speeds. It may also be possible to rotate and move.

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (D), the fourth symbol 079SG005J has an upper symbol 079SG005Ja and a lower symbol 079SG005Jb, and these upper symbol 079SG005Ja and lower symbol 079SG005Jb alternately flash at a constant cycle. This indicates that special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, for these upper pattern 079SG005Ja and lower pattern 079SG005Jb, if the variable display result is a loss, both will be turned off (turned OFF) at the end timing of the variable display, while the variable display result will be a jackpot or a loss. In this case, both lights are turned on (turned ON) at the end timing of the variable display.

In addition, the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are based on the timing at which a new pending memory occurs and the timing at which a new variable display starts. This is a display in which only the number changes. In other words, the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U. , unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of variable display.

Next, the display control section 123 in the feature section 079SG will be explained. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 is capable of displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on instructions from the performance control CPU 120, and can display multiple types of image data. By arranging the images and displaying the images on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When not displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. The predetermined image is not displayed on the production screen by controlling the image based on the data not to be displayed on the production screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(A), image data 1 displays the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and displays the fourth This is data drawn to display the pattern 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn to display a small pattern of the image data 1 decorative pattern in the first display area 079SG005F (left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 10-3(B), image data 2 is data drawn to display images of a chance-up effect, a still image display effect, and an operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. .

As shown in FIG. 10-3(C), image data 3 is data drawn to display a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(C), these image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3 have display priorities for displaying the images on the image display device 5. is set. As for the display priority, image data 1 is set to be the highest and image data 3 is set to be the lowest (display priority of images in the image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3). . That is, in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, an image based on image data 2 is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1, and an image based on image data 3 is displayed as a lower layer image. The image is displayed as a lower layer (lowest layer) image than the image based on image data 1 and the image based on image data 2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-3(D), in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 2 is displayed with priority over an image based on image data 3, and an image based on image data 1 is displayed with priority over an image based on image data 3. It is displayed with priority over the image based on image data 2 and the image based on image data 3.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-3(D), when an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3 are displayed on the image display device 5 at the same time, the image data 3 Since the image based on the image data 3 is displayed as the lowest hierarchical image, the image based on the image data 3 may be at least partially difficult to see or become invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, although details will be described later, images based on image data 1 and image data 2 are always displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images whose progress speed is constant, while images based on image data 3 The image based on the image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a moving image or a still image at a plurality of advancing speeds based on data stored in the CGROM in advance.

In particular, with this feature section 079SG, the details will be described later, but during the super reach reach effect, the video of the reach effect can be displayed at the normal progress speed V1 and the progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than V1. It becomes. This is because the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V1 and the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, only the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and by performing predetermined processing on this data, a part of the effect video for the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may also be possible to display it.

In this way, in this feature section 079SG, by setting the video progress speed, which is the speed at which the performance video changes, to V1, the non-slow motion period, where the progress speed of the ready-to-reach performance perceived by the player is the fast first speed, and the video By setting the progressing speed to V2, which is slower than V1, a slow motion period is set in which the progressing speed of the ready-to-reach effect recognized by the player is at a second slow speed. In other words, a slow-motion video that is a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance in this feature section 079SG is slow is that the video progresses compared to a non-slow-motion video whose video progress speed is V1, which is displayed before the slow-motion video. It is fine as long as it is slow.

Note that this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach effects (see Figures 10-18 to 10-25), but the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, for example, the content of the effect video displayed on the image display device 5 as a super reach effect is the same as the content of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, but the video progress speed By executing a super reach performance that does not change from V1 to V2, that is, a slow motion period, the super reach performance shown in Figures 10-18 to 10-25 becomes a slow motion period. It may be made easier for the player to recognize.

In other words, when performing a super reach effect in which the content of the effect video is the same but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the effect video at the second speed slower than the first speed in the present invention This means that by displaying a video with the same content at a video progression speed V2 that is slower than the video progression speed V1 in a non-slow motion super reach performance, The displayed performance video corresponds to this.

As described above, in this feature section 079SG, by slowing down the video progress speed of the performance video, a slow motion performance is created in which the progress speed of the reach performance that the player feels is slow, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is Although the output of the output does not change from the playback speed V3, the present invention is not limited to this. By conversely speeding up the playback speed of the sound output from the game effect lamp 9 and the light emission period of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo slow motion that makes the player feel that the progress speed of the ready-to-win performance has slowed down may be constructed.

In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 079SG is equipped with a plurality of performance output means including a display means capable of displaying a performance video, and the speed of progress of the performance by at least one performance output means among these performance output means. Any technique may be used as long as it can make the player recognize that the performance being executed is slow motion during the slow motion period by making the difference between the slow motion period and the non-slow motion period.

Note that this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which the display of the reach effect animation is always executed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion The period may be such that the progress speed of the display of the reach effect animation can be changed (for example, the progress speed may gradually decrease over time, or the progress speed may increase or decrease within a predetermined range).

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this feature section 079SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit", as shown in Figure 10-4 (B), for example. Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 10-4(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this feature section 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 10-6(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 079SG, a common special figure display result judgment table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 079SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 079SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more judgment values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 079SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 079SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 10-6(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this feature section 079SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the first special figure game and the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed so that the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state where game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows an example of the structure of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 079SG determines whether the jackpot type is one of multiple types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is decided to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "jackpot". This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 079SG using FIG. 10-7(B), in this feature section 079SG, as jackpot types, high accuracy control and time saving control are performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "probable variable jackpot C" are executed and shift to a high probability high base state, and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, only the time saving control is executed and the state changes to a low probability high base state. A transitional “non-probable jackpot” is set.

The jackpot game state based on "probable variable jackpot A" is a jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). The jackpot game state based on the "probable variable jackpot B" is a jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds). The jackpot game state based on the "probable variable jackpot C" is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed in two rounds (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds). Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. The "non-probable variable jackpot" is sometimes referred to as the 2-round (2R) non-probable variable jackpot.

Also, although not particularly illustrated, the small winning game state in this feature section 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the opening time is the same as the variable jackpot C. This is the open period (0.1 seconds in this feature part 079SG). Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

The high-precision control and time-saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming states of Probable Variable Jackpot A, Probable Variable Jackpot B, and Probable Variable Jackpot C are continuously executed until a jackpot occurs again after the corresponding jackpot gaming state ends. . Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot A or variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. This occurs continuously, resulting in a so-called consecutive home situation.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 079SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 10-7 (A), the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a special game or not, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a definite jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot type of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the type of jackpot may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 10-8 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 079SG. In this feature part 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Although this feature section 079SG provides only one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. are provided. It may be provided. Furthermore, a plurality of super reach variation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . .

Incidentally, the variation patterns in this feature section 079SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small win".

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 079SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, as described later, the types of these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, etc. Then, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and the random number MR3 for determining the type of variation may be provided. The type of variation pattern may be determined first from the random number value, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 079SG. In this feature section 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α3 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-5 (Super Reach β3 jackpot fluctuation pattern). In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A or a probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the corresponding jackpot variation pattern determination table A to change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot). (variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the numbers of determination values assigned to PB1-2 to PB1-5 are different between the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 to PB1-3, 300 to PB1-4, and 500 to PB1-5. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 to PB1-3, 315 to PB1-4, and 515 to PB1-5. In other words, in this feature section 079SG, when the variable display result is a variable jackpot, the percentage of PB1-3 and PB1-4, which are the super reach β system variation patterns, is higher than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. Since the variation pattern in the variable display is determined as follows, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special win fluctuation pattern determination table, and use the special win fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the fluctuation pattern as PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern). do.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 variation pattern), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α2 deviation), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using variation pattern determination table C, change the variation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α2 deviation), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (Non-reach deviation pattern for time saving), PA2-1 (Normal reach deviation pattern), PA2-2 (Super reach α2 deviation pattern), PA2-3 (Super reach α3 deviation pattern), and PA2 It is determined from PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is off) and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 079SG is "off", the special figure is The rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1). This makes it possible to prevent the game from being delayed and shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-8, the reach performance of Super Reach α1 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first reach performance, which will be described later, is executed. This is a reach performance where the display result is a jackpot, and the reach performance of Super Reach α2 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PA2-2) executes the first half and the second half of the first reach performance, which will be described later. This is a reach effect in which the variable display result is off after the change, and the reach effect of Super Reach α3 (the reach effect executed with the variable display in variable pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach effect described later. This is a ready-to-win performance in which a second ready-to-win performance, which will be described later, is further executed after the first half and the second half of the performance are executed, and the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss.

As for the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, as shown in Figures 10-8 and 10-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the more variable the display. It is set so that the percentage of the result being a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is high. In other words, for the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3, the percentage of the variable display result being a jackpot after being executed up to the second reach effect is the percentage when the first reach effect is executed. The variable display result is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, the reach performance of Super Reach β1 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PB1-4) is a reach performance in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot after the first half of the third reach performance, which will be described later, is executed. Yes, the reach performance of Super Reach β2 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PA2-4) has a variable display result that is off after the first half and the second half of the third reach performance, which will be described later, are executed. This is a reach performance, and the reach performance of Super Reach β3 (the reach performance executed with variable display in variable pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) executes the first half and the second half of the third reach performance, which will be described later. After that, a fourth ready-to-win presentation, which will be described later, is further executed, and the variable display result is a ready-to-win presentation in which the result is a jackpot or a loss.

Regarding the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5, as shown in Figures 10-8 and 10-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the more variable the display. It is set so that the percentage of the result being a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is high. In other words, for the variable displays of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, the percentage of variable display results that are executed up to the 4th reach effect and the variable display result becomes a jackpot is The variable display result is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the second reach effect is always performed after the first reach effect, and the fourth reach effect is always executed after the third reach effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the second ready-to-win performance and the fourth ready-to-win performance may be executed alone.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, during variable display, each reach effect can be executed in combination of the first reach effect and the second reach effect, and can be executed in combination with the third reach effect and the fourth reach effect. Although possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to these, and the reach effect can be combined with combinations other than these combinations (for example, the first reach effect and the fourth reach effect, the second reach effect and the third reach effect). A case may also be provided in which this is executed in combination with a reach effect, etc.).

In addition, in this feature part 069SG, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variation patterns of the super reach β series (variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are generally the same as those of the super reach α series. The proportion of variable display results that become jackpots (jackpot expectation level) is set higher than the variation patterns (variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3). Although not limited to, some of the fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach β series (variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are the fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach α series (variation patterns PA2- 2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) may have a lower jackpot expectation.

The RAM 102 in this feature section 079SG includes a game control data holding area 079SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The data holding area 079SG150 for game control shown in FIG. , a game control timer setting section 079SG153, a game control counter setting section 079SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 079SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 079SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, but it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 079SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal figure reservation storage section 079SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 079SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 079SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 079SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting section 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 is an area for holding various data used to control performance operations, such as data storage for performance control as shown in FIG. 10-11(A). Area 079SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a production control flag setting section 079SG191, a production control timer setting section 079SG192, a production control counter setting section 079SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 079SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 079SG191 includes a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 079SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 079SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 079SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting section 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 079SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-11(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 079SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning prize designation command (the first starting opening winning prize designation command or the second starting opening winning prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (the Two commands (1 pending memory number notification command or 2nd pending memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are associated with the starting opening winning designation command and the pending storage number notification command. , storage areas (entries) for separately storing the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory are secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are determined later when the start condition is met and variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition has been met, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" are It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when ending the process.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A when a starting winning is made to the first starting winning opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , pending storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in Figure 10-11(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in Figure 10-11(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning determination process of the feature section 079SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 079SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079SGS101; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value is (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154, for example. When the first special symbol pending memory number is not the upper limit value at step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 079SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbol pending memories has reached the upper limit value at step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 079SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079SGS104; Y), the number of second special figure pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 079SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 079SGS105 (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 079SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (step 079SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (step 079SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 079SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 079SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 079SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning prize designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 079SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, the effect control board 12 is stored in the pending memory. Settings for transmitting the number notification command are performed (step 079SGS113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115), and then the process of step 079SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS116), and then the starting winning prize is Finish the process. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 10-13 is a part of a flowchart showing the effect control process processing in this feature section 079SG. In the production control process processing, the production control CPU 120 executes the prefetch notice setting process (step S161), and then updates the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second pending storage display area 079SG005U, and Hold display operation processing (step 079SG162) for operating (rotating display) the hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop operation process (step 079SGS163) and the fourth symbol display process (step 079SG164) that executes the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J, one of steps S170 to S177 is executed depending on the value of the production control process flag. Execute the process.

FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 079SGS271; Y), the buffer number of the first special symbol pending memory in the reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of start winning is set to "1-0" to "1-4". Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-0". Then, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A are stored for one buffer number each. Shift to the upper position (step 079SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is a third variable display result designation command or a fourth variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot B or probability variable jackpot C, a stop symbol other than "7" It is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is determined from among the chance numbers "334", "778", etc. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Then, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), proceed to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y). executes a chance-up performance determination process (step 079SGS278), and determines whether or not to perform a chance-up performance in the latter half of the first ready-to-reach performance or the second half of the third reach-based performance.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-15, if the variable display result is a failure, it is decided to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 20%, and it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 80%. decide. Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 80%, and it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 20%. In other words, in the variable reach display of the feature section 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the jackpot expectation level is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 and 10-32, only one performance pattern is provided as a performance mode of chance-up performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of performance patterns may be provided as performance modes of the chance-up performance, and the expected degree of jackpot may be made to differ depending on which performance pattern the chance-up performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this feature section 079SG, there is only one timing to start the chance up performance as shown in FIGS. 10-27 and 10-32, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of performance start timings may be provided, and the expected degree of jackpot may be varied depending on from which performance start timing the chance-up performance is started.

Further, after determining whether to execute or not execute the chance-up effect in step 079SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079SGS279). If the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279; Y), the notification performance (big hit notification performance or miss A still image display effect for determining a performance pattern of a still image display effect that displays the still image displayed at the end of the second reach effect on the image display device 5 during a period until the start of the notification effect (notification effect). The determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-16(A), if the variable display result is a failure, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100%. If pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a jackpot, the still image display performance pattern will be determined to pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80% and pattern SG-2 at a rate of 20%. do.

As shown in FIG. 10-16(B), the still image display effect pattern SG-1 freezes the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach effect. The still image display effect pattern SG-2 is a performance pattern that is displayed as a still image after the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 is displayed as a still image at the end of the second reach performance. , is a production pattern that changes the color of the still image.

In particular, pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot, so when the second reach effect is executed, the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the still image changes color.

In addition, if it is not the variation pattern of super reach α3 in step 079SGS281 (step 079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) ( Step S079SGS282). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than super reach β3 (step 079SGS282; N), the process proceeds to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach β3 (step 079SGS281; Y ), executes an operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining a performance pattern of an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B during execution of the fourth reach effect, and proceeds to step 079SGS283. .

In the operation promotion performance determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-17(A), if the variable display result is a failure, the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance to pattern SS at a rate of 80%. -1 is determined, and pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-2 at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17(B), the operation promotion performance pattern SS-1 is a performance pattern in which an image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The effect pattern SS-2 is an effect pattern in which the image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a larger size than the pattern SS-1.

In other words, the operation promotion performance in the feature section 079SG is performed when the image of the large size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (the operation promotion performance is executed in pattern SS-2). (in the case where the image of the push button 31B of normal size is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5) is higher than the case (in which case the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1). Since the variable display result has a high probability of becoming a jackpot (a jackpot notification effect is executed), the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion effect is executed. This allows players to increase their interest in gaming.

In step 079SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute each effect such as the above-mentioned chance-up effect, still image display effect, operation promotion effect, etc., and the effect control pattern (process table) according to the effect pattern and variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079SGS284).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 079SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the fluctuation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the fluctuation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 079SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display production process (step S172) (step 079SGS288).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer every time the variable display performance processing is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction times out. Determine whether or not. If the process timer after the subtraction has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer after the subtraction has timed out, the process data At the same time as the switching is performed, the next process timer is started, and the presentation device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data.

Next, the performance mode of variable display of super reach α1 to α3 and super reach β1 to β3 in this feature section 079SG will be explained based on FIGS. 10-18 to 10-35.

First, regarding the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 shown in Figures 10-18, 10-19, and 10-26 (A) to 10-26 (G), when the variable display starts, the image display In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, a moving image such as a variable display of decorative patterns is started at a normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right (the moving speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progressing speed of V3. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R start playing BGM, sound effects, etc. according to the variable display at the normal playback speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts blinking at a constant cycle. Ru. Hereinafter, the blinking or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in this feature section 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are all synchronously blinking or lighting. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

As shown in Figures 10-18, 10-19, and 10-26 (A) to 10-26 (C), when the timing of the development of the reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first half of the first reach effect is reached. The execution period begins, and a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A is started. As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first half execution period of the first reach performance begins, a video in which the friendly character A attacks the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 described above to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which friendly character A attacks enemy character A in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F) In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is a variable display of super reach α1, when the first half execution period of the first reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 10-18 and 10-26 (E) to 10-26 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, after a video of friendly character A's successful attack and enemy character A falling down is displayed as a jackpot notification effect, the decorative symbols stop at the jackpot combination and the jackpot game state is controlled. will be notified. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

During the jackpot notification performance, the video of the part where ally character A's attack is successful is displayed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to Figure 10-26 (E)), and the subsequent enemy character The display of the moving image of the part where the robot collapses is executed at the advancing speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26(F)). Then, the video of the part where it is announced that the decorative symbols stop at the jackpot combination and are controlled to the jackpot game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Figure 10-26 (G) ).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of Super Reach α2 or Super Reach α3, when the first half execution period of the first reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 10-19 and 10-26 (D) , the attack of the ally character A is not successful, and the period shifts to the second half execution period of the first reach performance.

As shown in Figure 10-19 and Figures 10-27(A) to 10-27(B), when the second half of the first reach performance begins, the battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, in the second half execution period of the first reach effect, when the effect video of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, a chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 10-27 (B). . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1 similarly to the effect video of the battle effect.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first reach performance execution period approaches, a video of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which friendly character A attacks enemy character A in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F) In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach α2, when the second half execution period of the first reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 10-19 and 10-27 (E) to 10-27 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, as a failure notification effect, after ally character A's attack fails and is defeated by enemy character A, the decorative symbols stop at a failure combination and the variable display result is a failure. will be notified.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the video display is executed at the normal progress speed V1 in the part where the attack of ally character A fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a failure. Ru.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are extinguished) ) is carried out.

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach α3, as shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, and 10-27 (D), during the second half execution period of the first reach effect, Character A's attack is successful and enemy character A is defeated. Then, the process shifts to the first half execution period of the second ready-to-reach performance.

As shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28 (A) to 10-28 (B), when moving to the execution period of the first half of the second reach effect, ally character A and enemy character B The battle performance progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the second reach performance first half execution period approaches, as shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28 (C), an image is The display of concentrated lines starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, and at the same time, the display of the moving image of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character B starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

Additionally, during the period in which friendly character A attacks enemy character B in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, while the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, the blinking cycle of the gaming effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-28(D), the number of concentrated lines as the effect production described above is gradually increased and displayed.

In other words, in the second half execution period of the second reach performance, as the progress speed of the battle performance video decreases to V2, the number of concentrated lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases and the game effect lamp 9 blinks intensely. Therefore, by increasing the number of concentrated lines and blinking the game effect lamp 9, it is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the performance result of the battle performance (Which one is executed, the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance). It is possible.

After the execution period of the second half of the second reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28 (E), it is displayed at the end of the battle effect as a still image display effect. The image that was displayed (in this feature section 079SG, the image immediately before the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F switches from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the rotation of the telop from left to right The movement in the direction is executed without changing while maintaining the proceeding speed V3, and the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R without changing while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is carried out without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 changes according to the progress of the battle production video. The cycle returns to the previous cycle when the speed decreased to V2.

Furthermore, if pattern SG-2 is determined as the performance pattern for the still image display performance, as shown in Figures 10-29(A) to 10-29(E), the battle performance will be used as the still image display performance. The colors of the last displayed image are reversed. After the still image display effect in which the color is reversed ends, a jackpot notification effect is displayed stating that ally character A's attack hits enemy character B, and after enemy character B falls down, the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. be notified. In particular, when the decorative symbols stop at a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-29 (F), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

As shown in Figure 10-20, the jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2 is that the video in which the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B is displayed at the progress speed V1. However, the moving image of the enemy character B falling down is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, a moving image in which the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination after the enemy character B falls down is displayed at the progressing speed V1. In particular, when the decorative symbols stop at a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect will not be reversed and the still image display effect will be changed to Figure 10-30 (A). ) ~ As shown in Figure 10-30 (D), there is a case where the jackpot notification effect is executed as described above, and a case where the jackpot notification effect is executed as shown in Figures 10-30 (F) ~ Figure 10-30 (H). There are times when a performance is performed.

The jackpot notification performance when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SG-1 is the same as the jackpot notification performance when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in Figure 10-20. In this example, a moving image in which the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B is displayed at a advancing speed of V1, but a moving image in which enemy character B falls down is displayed at advancing speed V2. Then, after the enemy character B falls down, the progress speed is displayed at V1. During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(E), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

In addition, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the failure notification effect is such that the attack of ally character A does not hit enemy character B, and conversely, the attack of enemy character B hits ally character A. After the ally character A falls down due to a hit, the decorative symbols stop at a wrong combination, and it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled.

As the failure notification effect, as shown in FIG. 10-21, a moving image of ally character A's attack until it is defeated by enemy character B without hitting is displayed at a progress speed of V1. During the failure notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (I), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are extinguished) ) is carried out.

Next, regarding the variable display of super reach β1 to β3 shown in Figures 10-22, 10-23, and 10-31 (A) to 10-31 (H), when the variable display starts, the image In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, a moving image such as a variable display of decorative patterns is started at a normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right (the moving speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progressing speed of V3. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R start playing BGM, sound effects, etc. according to the variable display at the normal playback speed of V4.

In addition, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts blinking at a constant cycle. Ru.

As shown in Figures 10-22, 10-23, and 10-31 (A) to 10-31 (C), when the timing of the development of the reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first half of the third reach effect is reached. The execution period begins, and a battle performance between ally character B and enemy character A is started. As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first half execution period of the third reach performance begins, a video of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 described above to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period in which the attack of ally character B towards enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period when the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is a variable display of super reach β1, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 10-22 and 10-31 (E) to 10-31 (G). Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a jackpot notification effect, a moving image of friendly character B's successful attack and enemy character A falling down is displayed, and then it is announced that the jackpot game state will be controlled. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

During the jackpot notification performance, the video of the part where ally character B's attack is successful is displayed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to Figure 10-30 (E)), and the subsequent enemy character The display of the moving image of the part where the robot collapses is executed at the advancing speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30(F)). Then, the video of the part where it is announced that the decorative symbols stop at the jackpot combination and the jackpot game state is controlled is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Figure 10-30 (G) ).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β2 or Super Reach β3, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 10-23 and 10-31 (D), , the attack of ally character B is not successful, and the execution period shifts to the second half of the third reach effect.

As shown in Figures 10-23 and 10-32 (A) to 10-32 (B), when the second half of the third reach performance begins, the battle performance between ally character B and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, in the second half execution period of the third reach effect, when the effect video of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, a chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 10-32 (B). . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1 similarly to the effect video of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed with priority over the effect animation for the chance-up effect, while the effect animation for the chance-up effect is displayed with the decorative pattern (the image shown in FIG. 10-32(B) It is displayed with priority over "7" displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display device 5. For this reason, in this feature section 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up effect, the player can recognize that the variable display is in progress by visually recognizing the small symbols, and also display the effect video of the chance-up effect. By displaying the symbols with priority over the symbols, it is possible to reliably secure an area on the image display device 5 for displaying the effect animation of the chance-up effect.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, the performance video of the chance-up performance is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design is displayed with priority over the performance video of the chance-up performance. may also be displayed with priority. By doing this, the player can easily recognize from which decorative symbol combination the reach effect that is currently being executed has developed, thereby improving the game's interest.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first reach performance execution period approaches, a video in which the friendly character B attacks the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which the attack of ally character B toward enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is the variable display of super reach β2, when the second half execution period of the third reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 10-23 and 10-32 (E) to 10-32 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, as a failure notification effect, after the attack of the friendly character B fails and is defeated by the enemy character A, it is reported that the variable display result is a failure.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the video display is executed at the normal progress speed V1 in the part where ally character B's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a failure. Ru.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R , the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguished display of the fourth symbol (display of the lights out of both the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb) ) is carried out.

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach β3, as shown in Figures 10-24, 10-25, and 10-32 (D), during the second half execution period of the 3rd reach effect, Character B's attack succeeds and defeats enemy character A. Then, the process moves to the execution period of the first half of the fourth reach performance.

As shown in Figures 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33 (A) to 10-33 (B), when moving to the execution period of the first half of the 4th reach effect, friendly character AB and enemy character B The battle performance progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the fourth reach performance first half execution period begins, the image display device 5 changes as shown in FIGS. 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33(C). In the first display area 079SG005F, display of a moving image in which ally character B attacks enemy character B is started. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which friendly character B attacks enemy character B in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F) In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, while the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, the blinking cycle of the gaming effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster).

In other words, in the second half execution period of the fourth reach performance, the progress speed of the video of the battle performance decreases to V2, and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 becomes more intense. It is possible to effectively draw a player's attention to the performance result (Which of the jackpot notification performance and the loss notification performance is executed).

Then, as the second half of the fourth reach performance progresses, the operation promotion performance is executed. When the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-1, the push button 31B is displayed at the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 together with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba that imitates the shape of the push button 31B. The display of the meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period and the effect image 079SG005E is started, and the updated display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged updated display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the periphery of the image display device 5 are started. As mentioned above, the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on image data 2 (see Figure 10-3), so they are displayed at a constant rate regardless of the progress speed of the battle effect. Displayed as a video of progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 10-33(D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the period for accepting operation of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by an updated display of the meter 079SG005M, while the effect image 079SG005E is enlarged. Update display progresses. In addition, since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player will be able to visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E, and when the operation promotion effect is not executed. The visibility of the battle performance is reduced. Since the execution period of the operation promotion performance is included in the second half of the fourth reach performance, the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion performance.

As shown in Figures 10-33 (D) and 10-33 (E), the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion performance, but the end timing of the operation promotion performance (push At the timing (timing when button 31B operation reception ends), the scene does not progress to the point where it is known whether or not the attack of friendly character B will hit enemy character B. In other words, the jackpot notification effect or the failure notification effect will not start. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-34(A) to 10-34(E), when the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-2, the first display on the image display device 5 In the center of the area 079SG005F, a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B starts to be displayed as an operation promotion image imitating the shape of the push button 31B, together with an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb whose size is larger than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba. The update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. As mentioned above, the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on image data 2 (see Figure 10-3), so they are displayed at a constant rate regardless of the progress speed of the battle effect. Displayed as a video of progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 10-34 (D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the period for accepting operation of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by an updated display of the meter 079SG005M, and at the same time, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb Most of the battle production images are hidden. Note that the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is an image having a larger size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and has a transmittance of 0%, as described above. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation promotion performance is included in the second half of the fourth reach performance, the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion performance.

As shown in Figures 10-34 (D) and 10-34 (E), the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion performance, but the end timing of the operation promotion performance (push At the timing (timing when button 31B operation reception ends), the scene does not progress to the point where it is known whether or not the attack of friendly character B will hit enemy character B. In other words, the jackpot notification effect or the failure notification effect will not start. It has become.

Then, if the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or if the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is If the game ends), the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed from the timing when these players operate the push button 31B or from the timing when the operation promotion performance ends.

As the jackpot notification performance after the operation promotion performance, as shown in Figures 10-24 and 10-35 (A) to 10-35 (C), a video of friendly character B's attack hitting enemy character B is shown. Although the animation is displayed at the advancing speed V1, the moving image of the enemy character B falling is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B falls is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (D), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

In addition, as a failure notification performance after the operation promotion performance, as shown in Figures 10-25 and 10-35 (E) to 10-35 (G), the attack of friendly character B hits enemy character B. First, on the contrary, after the enemy character B's attack hits the ally character B and the ally character B falls down, it is announced that the jackpot game state will not be controlled. In particular, when the failure notification effect is executed, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-25, as a failure notification performance, a moving image is displayed at a progressing speed V1 until the attack of the ally character B does not hit and the decorative symbols stop with a failure combination. During the failure notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are extinguished) ) is carried out.

In addition, Figure 10-26 (H), Figure 10-27 (H), Figure 10-29 (F), Figure 10-30 (E), Figure 10-30 (I), Figure 10-31 (H), As shown in FIG. 10-32 (H), FIG. 10-35 (D), and FIG. 10-35 (H), in this feature section 079SG, at the end timing of the variable display, the telop (message) is displayed on the image display device 5. Although the present invention is not limited to this, at the end timing of the variable display, the display of the telop display area 079SG005T itself on the image display device 5 is illustrated. may be performed, but the display of the telop (message) itself in the telop display area 079SG005T may not be performed.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, in the variable display of super reach α3 and super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened in a slow motion period other than immediately before the notification performance. Further, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened also during a part of the period (non-slow motion period) in which the display of the ready-to-win effect animation is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance is During the first half execution period, the videos of each reach performance are displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed of V1, and the second half of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance is displayed. During the partial execution period, the moving images of each reach effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at a progressing speed V2. For this reason, while the video of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2, the degree of emotional empathy of the player towards the ally character displayed during the reach effect is increased, and jackpot notification is announced. Since it is possible to increase expectations for the execution of the performance, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. On the other hand, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance, BGM and performance sounds from speakers 8L and 8R are Since the output is still output at the normal playback speed of V4, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, the sound output device in this feature section 079SG includes a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit 079SG134, and speakers 8L and 8R, so it is possible to reproduce the variable display including when performing a reach effect or when playing a jackpot game. Performance sounds such as high-quality BGM (songs) and sound effects can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R at appropriate volumes, making it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach performance, the game effect Since the lamp 9 flashes at a shorter period than usual, the performance effect can be improved by flashing the game effect lamp 9 at a shorter period during the period when the progress speed of the performance video is V2.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, a mode is exemplified in which the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second ready-to-win performance or the fourth ready-to-win performance. By doing so, the player can recognize from the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 that the notification effect will be executed soon, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, an example is given in which the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing from the first ready-to-win effect to the fourth ready-to-win effect.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect, the progress of the effect video of the reach effect. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, the rotational speed of the hold display and the moving speed of the caption are both constant at V3, and the playback speed of the performance sound output from speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, an example is given in which the rotation speed of the hold display displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the moving display speed of the caption are both V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. The rotational speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each reach effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, so each reach effect During execution, the player can more easily recognize the ready-to-reach effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, during periods other than during the reach effect, the rotating display of the pending display is rotated at rotation speed V3 in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U. This is executed, and in the telop display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is executed at the moving speed V3. In other words, the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the telop are executed at the same speed as during the reach effect, so that the player can It is possible to prevent these pending displays and telops from becoming difficult to recognize.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-2(C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and end the display, and at the same time the telop display area 079SG005T ends. Since it is displayed again at the left end of 079SG005T and moved again from the left to the right, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

Note that in this feature section 079SG, the entire telop is always displayed moving in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire telop is always displayed moving in the telop display area 079SG005T. There may be a timing when a part of the displayed telop becomes invisible to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28, in the second half execution period of the second reach effect, the display of the effect animation of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, and the image By executing the effect presentation of displaying concentrated lines on the display device 5, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect during the latter half execution period of the second ready-to-reach presentation, thereby improving the interest in the game. In particular, in this feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28(C) and 10-28(D), the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as the battle performance progresses, so the display of concentrated lines increases. By increasing the number, the player can more easily recognize that the second ready-to-win performance is finished and the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the effect production according to the present invention is exemplified as a display of concentrated lines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The output of a specific sound effect from 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as effect effects, and the second reach effect ( As the battle performance) progresses, the effect level of the effect performance is increased one after another (for example, increasing the range of motion of the movable body 32, increasing the volume of a specific sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, The vibration of the controller 31A or the push button 31B may be increased, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be vibrated, etc.).

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (G), and Figure 10-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect. When the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden and the first display area 079SG005F is displayed. Since the image of the jackpot notification performance is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the visibility of the jackpot notification performance in the second display area 079SG005Sa is further increased, and the player is made aware that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. It's easy to do.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, when executing the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. In a state where the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa display the image of the jackpot notification effect (the first In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed overlappingly with the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T).

At this time, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are made transparent or displayed in a reduced size, or the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U are displayed in a reduced size. The visibility of the jackpot notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the pending displays displayed in the pending display area.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29, in the second half execution period of the second reach effect, the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F. As shown in FIG. 10-21, during the still image display effect execution period, the rotation display of the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and Since the moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, it is possible that a suspended display is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect, or that the telop is being displayed moving. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the pending display, and by stopping the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the caption, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the pending display and the display of the caption. .

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 10-16 and 10-29 (A) to 10-29 (B), when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, the color of the still image is inverted. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is being performed by inverting the color of the still image.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, as a mode for changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as a still image display effect, a mode in which the color of the still image is inverted has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Examples of ways to change the color of a still image include, but are not limited to, changing the color of a still image to black and white, changing only part of the color of a still image, and adding new colors to a still image. It may be added.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2, Since the colors of the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the fourth symbol displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not reversed, the player can see the colors displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. By comparing the hold display, telop, fourth symbol, etc. with the still image, it is possible to easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

In addition, in each variable display of the super reach in this feature part 079SG, there is a pattern in which the first reach effect or the third reach effect is executed and then the second reach effect or the fourth reach effect is executed, and a pattern in which the first reach effect or the third reach effect is executed. There is a pattern in which the variable display ends after the execution of the performance, transitioning to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance, so the display of the reach performance video progresses during the first reach performance or third reach performance. Whether or not to move to the second reach performance or fourth reach performance after being executed at speed V2, and display of the performance video of the reach performance during the second reach performance or third reach performance are executed at progress speed V2 Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the player is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled after the game is played, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-19, 10-20, 10-21, 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, during the first reach performance and the third reach performance, the The production in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character during the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance and the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance are performed at the same time. Since it is executed at speed V1, the progress speed when transitioning from the first half execution period of the first reach performance to the second half execution period of the first reach performance or from the first half execution period of the third reach performance to the second half execution period of the third reach performance is different from the progress speed of the performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character during the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance, thereby excessively increasing the expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. You can prevent this from happening. Furthermore, Figure 10-18, Figure 10-20, Figure 10-22, Figure 10-24, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-26 (E) to Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (C) ~ Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (B) ~ Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) ~ Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) ~ Figure As shown in 10-35(C), in the jackpot notification performance of this feature section 079SG, while displaying a video when an enemy character collapses due to a hit by an attack of an ally character is executed at a progress speed of V2, Figure 10-19, Figure 10-21, Figure 10-23, Figure 10-25, Figure 10-27 (E) to Figure 10-27 (G), Figure 10-30 (F) to Figure 10-30 (H ), as shown in Figures 10-32 (E) to 10-32 (G), and Figures 10-35 (D) to 10-35 (F), in the failure notification effect, a video is displayed when an ally character falls down. is displayed at the progress speed V1, so when the loss notification effect is executed, the display of the effect video of the loss notification effect is not executed at the progress speed V2, which may cause player dissatisfaction. It can also be prevented from becoming excessively high, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the variable display result of super reach is a failure notification effect is executed, the display of the effect animation of the failure notification effect is executed at the progress speed V1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a part of the variable display of the super reach, the presentation animation of the loss notification presentation may be displayed at a progress speed V2 that is slower than V1. By doing this, it is possible to create variations in the performance of the failure notification performance and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which the progress speed V1 of the performance video during the jackpot notification performance is the third speed in the present invention, and the progression speed V2 of the performance video during the jackpot notification performance is the fourth speed in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V1. Furthermore, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-24 and 10-25, the operation promotion effect is executed when the video of the reach effect is being displayed at the progress speed V2 during the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect. Therefore, the performance effect of the fourth reach performance can be enhanced by the operation promotion performance.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the display of the effect video of the fourth reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 while the operation promotion effect is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. During execution of the operation promotion performance, display of the performance video of the fourth ready-to-reach performance may be performed at the progress speed V1. Furthermore, it is possible to execute a suggestion performance that suggests that the operation promotion performance will be executed before the operation promotion performance is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestion performance, the performance video of the fourth reach performance is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may be executed.

In addition, as an operation promotion effect of the feature section 079SG, in addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a meter 079SG005M that notifies the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is now displayed in the first display area 079SG005F. While these operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or operation promotion image 079SG005Bb and meter 079SG005M are displayed, the display of the fourth reach effect animation at the progress speed V2 is continued, but the notification effect does not progress. . Furthermore, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. With this, the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect is executed. Therefore, the notification effect is not executed at a timing before the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B ends (until the operation promotion effect ends), so if the push button is not operated by the player, the notification effect is It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, although the embodiment in which the detection means in the present invention is the push button 31B is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means may be other than the push button 31B, such as the stick controller 31A. In addition to the operation means described above, sensors capable of detecting the player's actions such as a motion sensor or a touch sensor may be used.

Also, Figures 10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-26(E) to 10-26(G), 10-29(C) to 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (B) to Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) to Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) to Figure 10-35 (C ), in the jackpot notification performance in feature section 079SG, the video of the part where the attack of the friendly character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progress speed V1, while the video of the part where the enemy character falls down is displayed at the progress speed of V1. Displayed at speed V2. In contrast, Figures 10-19, 10-21, 10-23, 10-25, 10-27(E) to 10-27(G), 10-30(E) to 10- 30(G), FIG. 10-32(E) to FIG. 10-32(G), and FIG. 10-35(D) to FIG. The moving image is displayed at the advancing speed V1, and is never displayed at the advancing speed V2. In other words, when a jackpot notification performance is executed, a part of the performance video of the jackpot notification performance is displayed at the progress speed V2, thereby giving the player the impression that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. can.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot in the present invention, a still image display effect can be executed in pattern SG-2 (a still image display effect in which colors are reversed). Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted as a still image display effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, a form in which the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 is used as a special effect in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention is , it may be possible to perform effects other than the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 (for example, effects in which a specific character is displayed, effects in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow color, etc.).

In addition, the operation promotion effect of this feature part 079SG is pattern SS-1 in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and a pattern SS-1 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F. This can be executed in any of the performance patterns including pattern SS-2 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, which is larger in size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, is displayed as the operation promotion image. When the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be viewed through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while in pattern SS-2 When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is hidden by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, so the operation promotion effect is more difficult than when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. The visibility of the battle performance of 4 reach performance is low. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-17, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot is the same as when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the variable display result is lower than the rate of hitting a jackpot, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2 is used to perform the operation promotion performance, thereby improving the interest in the game. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33 (C) to 10-33 (E), when displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba as an operation promotion effect, the operation promotion image While displaying 079SG005Ba, the display of the animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb changes the progress speed V2 (slow motion ), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion performance is pattern SS. -2, in addition to displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, by displaying a dedicated background image over the entire display area of the image display device 5, the fourth reach effect production video (battle (direction) may be completely invisible. In addition, during the period when the 4th reach performance video (battle performance) is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to the operation promotion performance pattern SS-2, the 4th reach performance video (battle performance) The display may be performed at the progress speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in this feature section 079SG, as super reach effects, a second reach effect can be executed after the first reach effect, and a fourth reach effect can be executed after the third reach effect. Furthermore, as the variable display of super reach, there is a variable display of super reach α1 that notifies the jackpot after the first half execution period of the first reach effect, and a variable display of super reach β1 that notifies the jackpot after the first half execution period of the third reach effect. Display, variable display of super reach α2 that executes the second half execution period of the first reach performance after the first half execution period of the first reach performance and informs of the failure, and the second half of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance Variable display of super reach β2 that executes a partial execution period and informs of failure, variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the second reach effect after the first reach effect exchange partial execution period, third reach effect exchange partial execution period It is possible to perform a variable display of Super Reach α3 that transitions to the 4th Reach performance after , and as shown in Figures 10-18 to 10-25, from the execution period of the first half of the 1st Reach performance to the latter half of the 1st Reach performance. When transitioning to the execution period, When transitioning from the first half of the first reach performance to the first half of the second reach performance, When transitioning from the first half of the third reach performance to the second half of the third reach performance , when transitioning from the second half execution period of the third reach performance to the first half execution period of the fourth reach performance, the performance video of each reach performance is executed at the progress speed V2, and from the first half execution period of the first reach performance to the first half execution period. When transitioning to the execution period of the second half of the reach performance, when transitioning from the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance to the execution period of the first half of the second reach performance, from the execution period of the first half of the third reach performance to the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance When transitioning from the second half execution period of the third reach performance to the first half execution period of the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as in other periods. Therefore, when transitioning from the first half part execution period of the first reach performance to the second half execution period of the first reach performance, when transitioning from the second half execution period of the first reach performance to the first half execution period of the second reach performance, the third reach performance When transitioning from the execution period of the first half of the performance to the second half of the third reach performance, and when transitioning from the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the first half of the fourth reach performance, the player is given a sense of discomfort. You can prevent it from getting stowed away. Furthermore, by displaying the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect at the progress speed V2, it is possible to easily recognize the branching of the ready-to-win effect drawn by the player.

In addition, in the variable display of super reach of this characteristic part 079SG, a form in which two reach effects can be executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display of super reach, three or more reach effects can be executed. It may be possible to perform a reach effect, or it may be possible to perform only one reach effect.

Although the characteristic portion 079SG of the present invention has been explained above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic portions, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature section 079SG, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a third reach effect, and a fourth reach effect are provided as reach effects for super reach, and in all of these reach effects, a part of the effect video of the reach effect is provided. Although a mode in which the display is executed at the progress speed V2 (slow motion) has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. A pattern in which the effect video is always displayed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the effect video is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Furthermore, the content of the effect may be different between a ready-to-win effect in which a part of the effect video is displayed at the progress speed V2 and a ready-to-reach effect in which the display of the effect video is not performed at the progress speed V2. By doing this, it is possible to create variations in the reach performance of the super reach, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is always played at a constant playback speed (playback speed V4) regardless of whether or not the presentation video is being displayed at the progress speed V2. Although the output format is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example 079SG-1, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a third reach effect, and a fourth reach effect are shown. In the first half of the execution period of the second half of each reach performance, the playback speed V4 is set from speakers 8L and 8R as in the first half execution period of each reach performance of 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance. While the production sound is output in V4, in the second half (slow motion period) of the execution period of the second half of each reach performance of the 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance, The effect sound may be output at a different playback speed (for example, playback speed V5 slower than V4). By doing this, the performance effect of the performance sound for the reach performance can be improved by varying the playback speed of the performance sound while the display of the performance video for the reach performance is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the performance effect of the performance sound for the reach performance can be improved. You can improve your interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-34, the first display area 079SG005F is visually recognized during the execution period of the reach effect by displaying the effect image 079SG005E, displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, etc. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, after the reach effect ends, , the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-36(A) to 10-36(D), when the second reach effect is being executed, when the second reach effect is finished together with the still image display effect, As part of the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), as shown in FIG. 10-36(E) and FIG. 10-36(F). As such, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot game state will be controlled as a jackpot notification performance, or that the jackpot game state will not be controlled as a loss notification performance.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-37(A) to 10-37(D), when the fourth reach effect is being executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player presses the push button 31B. When the operation promotion effect ends without operating the button 31B, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as part of the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the second display. The image is enlarged and displayed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), as shown in FIG. 10-37(E) and FIG. 10-37(F). As such, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot game state will be controlled as a jackpot notification performance, or that the jackpot game state will not be controlled as a loss notification performance.

Note that the effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. 10-3(B), and the drawing range is expanded as an image based on the image data 2. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce only the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F without reducing the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

In this way, in this modified example 079SG-2, while the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, After the end of the reach effect or the end of the fourth reach effect, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F as part of the notification effect, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is reduced. does not change, so by changing the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the timing of the notification effect, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb changes. By not changing, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the pending display, telop display, variable display of the fourth symbol, etc.

Furthermore, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image that is drawn as an image of the second image data shown in FIG. The visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by being enlarged toward the display area 079SG005Sb. It is possible to accurately reduce only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F, and the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be drawn from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by being executed toward the area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the areas corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be made difficult to change.

Furthermore, although this modified example 079SG-2 exemplifies a form in which the operation promotion performance is executed during the fourth reach performance, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion performance is part of the notification performance. It may be executed as a part.

In addition, when performing the operation promotion effect as part of the notification effect, as shown in FIGS. 10-38(A) to 10-38(F) as a modification 079SG-3, the same as modification 079SG-2 is performed. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 10-38(D). do.

Note that by displaying these operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG.

Thereafter, the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the player operating the push button 31B, or the operation promotion performance is completed without the player operating the push button 31B, or the jackpot gaming state It is reported that the system is not controlled.

As described above, in this modified example 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced due to the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data Since the visibility of the push button 31B does not decrease, the operation promotion effect can be made more prominent than the fourth ready-to-reach effect, and the player can be effectively urged to operate the push button 31B.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the variable display result is always a jackpot, but the present invention The invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example No. 079SG-4, if the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always It may be possible to have a variable probability jackpot (or even a variable probability jackpot A that is most advantageous for the player). Furthermore, as a performance pattern when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state again after the loss notification performance is executed once. It may also be possible to perform a revival effect that notifies the user of the situation. In addition, in the case where the revival effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the jackpot type will be a variable jackpot or a non-probable variable jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot). There may be a case where the game is controlled to a jackpot game state and a case where it is controlled to a jackpot game state of variable jackpot. By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot notification effect will be executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. .

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, a message indicating the gaming status is displayed as an example of the telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this. The displayed captions may include a message indicating whether or not the variable display that is being executed or the variable display that has not yet started will be controlled to a jackpot game state, the title of the reach effect that is currently being executed, etc. good.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, a mode is exemplified in which a caption can be displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T according to the state of the performance being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the caption display area 079SG005T The telops displayed are those that can identify the gaming status, the expectation level that the variable display result will be a jackpot in the variable display being executed (jackpot expectation level), explanation of the performance being executed (especially the reach performance), and the reach performance. It may also be a preview performance that can be executed from a timing earlier than the above.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-34, during the period when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the operation promotion effect (operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion The display of image 079SG005Bb) has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is executed after the moving image of the reach effect returns from the progress speed V2 to the progress speed V1. Good too.

Furthermore, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-34, an example is given in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed on the image display device 5 as the operation promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect includes not only simply displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, but also displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. As a pre-display effect, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of each push button 31B are displayed overlappingly, thereby creating an operation promotion image. An effect may be performed in which 079SG005Ba or operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed.

In addition, when performing the effect in which the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5 as a precursor effect of the operation promotion effect, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5. The moving display speed may be reduced as the image approaches the center of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation promotion effect will be executed, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, when displaying the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although a mode is illustrated in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (emission colors) of the game effect lamp 9 is different from when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. It's okay. For example, when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in multiple colors, while the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. When playing, the game effect lamp 9 may be able to emit light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the moving image of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the game interest from decreasing due to the emitted light color of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, when displaying the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although a mode is illustrated in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the moving image of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be made longer. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the display of the moving image of the reach effect and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-26, 10-29, 10-30, 10-31, and 10-35, the performance mode of the jackpot notification performance is the end of the reach performance. Later, an example is shown in which the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in combinations that indicate a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in combinations that indicate a jackpot. The timing may be during the reach performance.

Furthermore, the present invention provides a gaming machine in which a player can select at least a part of the effect sounds such as BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. May be applied to By doing this, if the player has set the output of the effect sound that matches his/her preference, when the video of each reach effect is being displayed at the progress speed V1, the speaker 8L , the effect sound output from 8R remains unchanged and is played back at the playback speed V4, so even though the player himself has selected the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the effect sound is played back at the playback speed V4. It is also possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to slow reproduction.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as an end suggestion performance in the present invention, it is possible to execute a performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance, and the performance Although we have exemplified a form in which the variable display result always fails when executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. After the effect in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is temporarily switched to the display of the normal background image before the reach effect, and then the variable display result shows that the jackpot is achieved. (For example, a case where a revival effect is performed) may be provided.

In addition, when performing the resurrection effect in this way, the game effect lamp 9 is lit and blinked before the animation of the resurrection effect is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the resurrection effect is displayed to the player. It may be made to recognize that it will be executed. Further, as a presentation mode of the resurrection presentation, for example, the ally character may attack the enemy character again and defeat the enemy character. In particular, when performing a resurrection effect, a part of the video of the resurrection effect (for example, a video of a scene where an enemy character collapses) is displayed at a progress speed of V2 to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. Good too.

Further, although a plurality of characteristic parts and modifications are disclosed in this specification, the gaming machine of the present invention can be implemented by combining two or more of these plurality of characteristic parts and modifications. You may.

For example, the pachinko game machine 1 of the feature section 079SG may be a pachinko game machine in which the jackpot probability can be changed by changing setting values as shown in FIGS. 1 to 9. In such a case, for example, in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1, a pattern is provided in which the variable display results are out of order, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to a high setting value (for example, 6) that is advantageous to the player. is set, even if the variable display results are off in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 at a higher rate than when other setting values are set in pachinko game machine 1. good. By doing this, the fact that the variable display result is off in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 can be used as a suggestion that a high setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, in the variable display of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach β1, it is possible to suppress the decrease in player's interest due to the variable display result being wrong, and to draw the attention of the players to the fact that the variable display result is wrong. It becomes possible.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game machine that plays a predetermined game is defined as a game machine that plays at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, it may be a slot machine or a general game machine as long as it performs the following.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described later may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. A sound output means capable of outputting a production sound (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM 079SG133, an amplification circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L, 8R and the audio control board 13), and a display capable of displaying a production video. means (e.g., image display device 5); ) (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control), and a light emitting means (for example, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F). , the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance includes music and sound effects (for example, a portion where BGM (music) and sound effects can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R), and the display means is variable. It is possible to display a specific display (for example, a hold display and an active display) corresponding to the display, and the effect execution means executes the effect animation in which the progress speed of the effect is a first speed in a first period of the predetermined effect. It can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, the first half execution period of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect) In the second period of the predetermined performance that is after the first period, the progress speed of the performance is set to the first It is possible to display a presentation video having a second speed slower than the speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach presentation, a second reach presentation, a third reach presentation, etc. (The portion where the video of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed of V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the effects and the fourth reach effect), and the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect are as described above. In both the first period and the second period, the sound output means can output the speed related to the effect sound at the same speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, During the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance, BGM and sound effects are played from speakers 8L and 8R at normal playback speed. A specific display effect (for example, a display pattern α of a pending display or an active display) that displays the specific display based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) ~ display pattern γ), and a specific light emitting effect (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, and in the specific display effect, the specific display is displayed. The specific light emitting effect is executed so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the light emitting means is completed (for example, in FIGS. 11-28, 11-29 (A) to 11-32 (H)). ), as shown in Figures 11-49(A) to 11-50(D), the portion where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit before the display of the pending display is completed), the specific light emitting effect is The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emitting effect is executed than when it is not executed (for example, as shown in Figure 11-24, when the winning flash effect is executed, (a portion where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when no flash effect is executed), the light emitting means is a first light emitting means (for example, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F), and the first light emitting means is The first light emitting means includes a different second light emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable lamp 9d), and the first light emitting means is a light emitting means for emitting light from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing. The first period (for example, the period from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period) and the period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. The light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during two periods (for example, the period from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is subject to the winning flash effect) (for example, the As shown in 11-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 during the execution period of the first winning flash effect, and at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T1 during the second period of winning flash effect. (blinking part at T2), the second light emitting means emits light in a manner according to the specific light emission effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner according to the variable display being executed during the second period. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d flash at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. However, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the second half, the part that flashes at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0) is an example of a gaming machine.

According to such a configuration, the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, the game can be made more interesting by producing sounds including music and sound effects. Furthermore, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and in the first period of the specific light emission effect, the light emitting means emits light. By causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, it is possible to make the specific light emitting effect more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for players to recognize.

In other words, by not changing the speed of the sound that corresponds to the predetermined effect, it is possible to create a gaming machine that is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a player can easily recognize the specific display. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to give players a sense of discomfort when installed in a gaming parlor, and whose presentation is easy for players to understand.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that does not give the player a sense of discomfort during the performance and makes it easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission performance, it is possible to implement a variable display. , a gaming machine (e.g., Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and includes light emitting means (e.g., main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker) that can emit light. lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F), display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to the variable display, and a predetermined A specific display effect that displays the specific display based on the fulfillment of a condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a part that displays a pending display or an active display in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ) and a specific light emitting effect (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, and a effect executing means (for example, a effect control CPU 120) that can execute the effect, and the effect executing means is configured to perform the specific display. In the performance, the specific light emission effect is executed so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed (for example, in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-29 (A ) ~ As shown in Figures 11-32 (H) and Figures 11-49 (A) ~ Figure 11-50 (D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit before the display of the pending display is completed. (part), the rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emitting effect is executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in Figure 11-24, when the winning flash effect is is executed, the proportion of control to the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the winning flash effect is not executed), the light emitting means is a first light emitting means (for example, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F). , a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, a movable lamp 9d), and the first light emitting means has a second light emitting means that is different from the first light emitting means. The first period from the start to a predetermined timing (for example, the period from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period) and the target of the specific light emission effect from the predetermined timing. A mode according to the specific light emitting effect during a second period up to a specific timing of the variable display (for example, a period from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect of the variable display that is subject to the winning flash effect). (For example, as shown in Figure 11-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 during the execution period of the winning flash effect in the first period, and during the execution period of the winning flash effect in the second period. During the execution period, the part that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner that corresponds to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner that corresponds to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, in FIG. 11-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d flash at a brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. During the period, the part that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T0) is an example of a gaming machine. Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

(form)
The gaming machine of form A1 is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display and active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A specific display effect that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a part that displays a pending display or an active display in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ) , a specific display display start effect) and a specific light emission effect that causes the light emitting means to emit light (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize);
Equipped with
The effect executing means executes the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIG. -28, as shown in Figures 11-29 (A) to 11-32 (H), and Figures 11-49 (A) to 11-50 (D), before the display of the pending display is completed. The part that lights up the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning a prize),
The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emitting effect is executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-24, when the winning flash effect is executed, (If the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning, the percentage of control to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed)
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g. winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g. main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body). lamp 9d);
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous period winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous period winning flash effect); A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness of C1 and (The part that blinks at cycle T1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the brightness is C2 and blinks at cycle T2),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner that corresponds to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner that corresponds to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, in FIG. 11-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d flash at a brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. During the period, the part blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0).
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect In this case, the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous by causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the specific display.

The gaming machine of form A2 is the gaming machine described in form A1,
The specific display effect is performed by an appearance effect section (for example, FIG. 11-15, FIG. 11-30(D) to FIG. 11-32(H), FIG. 11-49(B)) where the appearance effect of the specific display is executed. ~As shown in Figure 11-50 (D), when the performance control CPU 120 executes the specific display display start performance execution process, an appearance animation in which the pending display and active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top is displayed. part), and a periodic effect part (for example, FIG. 11-15, FIG. 11-30 (D) to As shown in FIG. 11-32 (H), FIG. 11-49 (B) to FIG. 11-50 (D), the performance control CPU 120 executes the specific display rotation display performance execution process, so that the suspended display and active (the part where the display is displayed as a rotating animation),
The timing at which the display of the specific display is completed is the start timing of the periodic effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-19 and 11-20, from the timing at which the appearance animation of the pending display or active display is completed, (The part where the rotation animation of these pending and active displays starts)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the specific display.

The gaming machine of form A3 is the gaming machine according to form A1 or form A2,
The effect execution means can start the specific light emission effect before the start of the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-29(A) to 11-32(H), When executing display start effect B, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp, etc. are activated as a winning flash effect from a timing before the display start of the pending display or active display. (The part where the body lamp 9d emits light)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the specific light emission effect is started before the start of the specific display effect, the specific light emission effect can be made more conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form A4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A3,
The specific display effect includes an appearance effect in which the specific display appears (for example, a specific display start effect),
The display means displays the specific display in a plurality of different display modes (for example, a specific display display start effect A that only performs an appearance animation in which a pending display or an active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top, and a first display mode in which the character A is It can be displayed in specific display display start effect B) that executes an appearance animation in which the pending display and active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top after acting on the pending memory display area 135SG005D and the active display area 135SG005A,
The period of the appearance effect varies depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, specific display display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, specific display display start effect B is 1.2 seconds),
The specific light emission effect is started before the end timing of the shortest appearance effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-49(A) to 11-50(D) , the part where the winning flash effect starts before the end timing of the specific display display start effect A)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of the display mode of the specific display, the specific light emission effect can be started before the appearance effect ends, so that the player can surely see the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. Recognizable.

The gaming machine of form A5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A4,
The effect executing means starts the specific light emitting effect after once controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to a low brightness state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, FIG. 11-29(A), 11-29(B), FIG. 11-49(A), and FIG. 11-49(B), when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F , the part that turns off the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission performance.
Note that the "low brightness state" in the present invention includes not only a state in which light is emitted at low brightness but also a state in which no light is emitted.

The gaming machine of form A6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A5,
The effect execution means starts the specific light emitting effect after once controlling the display means to a low visibility state (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-11, when executing a flash effect at the time of winning, the image is (The part that starts the flash effect at the time of winning after reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 by reducing the brightness of the backlight etc. built into the display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
Note that the "low visibility state" in the present invention refers to a state in which the visibility of the display means is lower than the previous state, and the visibility of the display is reduced by a method other than reducing the brightness of the display means. It also includes a degraded state.

The gaming machine of form A7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A6,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a preview effect) that suggests that the variable display will be controlled in an advantageous state while executing the variable display, and is capable of executing a suggestive effect that indicates that the variable display will be controlled in an advantageous state. The specific light emitting effect can be executed even when the As shown in (n), the part where the winning flash effect can be executed depending on whether the preview effect is being executed or not),
A variable display compatible sound corresponding to the variable display (the variable display compatible sound shown in FIG. 11-28), a suggestive performance compatible sound corresponding to the suggestive performance (the preview performance compatible sound shown in FIG. 11-29(A)), Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect (sound corresponding to the winning flash effect shown in FIG. 11-29(B)),
The sound output means includes:
When the specific light emitting effect is executed while the variable display compatible sound is being output, the specific light emitting effect compatible sound can be output with priority over the variable display compatible sound that is being output (for example, As shown in Figure 11-29 (B), when executing the winning flash effect while the variable display is being executed, the variable display compatible sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2)),
When the specific light emitting effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 11-29 (B), when executing the winning flash effect during the execution of the preview effect, the sound corresponding to the preview effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. Part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be easily heard, and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect allows the player to execute the specific light emission effect. It becomes easier to recognize.

The gaming machine of form A8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A7,
Equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) capable of outputting sound,
The effect executing means outputs a sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect from the sound output means before the display of the specific display is completed and the light emitting means emits light in the specific light emitting effect (for example, FIG. 11-28 , As shown in Figures 11-29(A) to 11-32(H), and Figures 11-49(A) to 11-50(D), execution of the winning flash effect is determined in response to the starting winning. (If this is the case, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect will start from the speakers 8L and 8R, and then the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will start, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display will be completed.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the predetermined condition is met by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A7,
Equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) capable of outputting sound,
In the specific light emission effect, the effect execution means includes:
A sound corresponding to a specific light emission effect can be output from the sound output means (for example, a part capable of outputting a sound corresponding to a flash effect when winning a prize from speakers 8L and 8R),
The light emitting means is caused to emit light before the completion of the display of the specific display and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-12, execution of a winning flash effect in response to a winning start) If it is determined, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can quickly recognize that the predetermined condition has been met by the light emitted from the light emitting means, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A9,
The specific light emitting effect is such that during the first period, the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner that corresponds to the specific light emitting effect, and during the second period, the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner that is more emphasized than the predetermined manner. This is a performance that emits light in a specific manner with a low degree of intensity (for example, as shown in Figure 11-28, during the execution period of the first period winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C1, and the second period winning flash is During the execution period of the time flash effect, the part where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 (C1>C2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by causing at least the first light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, the player can be made aware of the start of a specific light emitting effect, and the first light emitting means continues to emit light in a predetermined manner during the second period as well. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting due to the light emitting and interfering with other effects.
Note that the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" in the present invention includes a low-speed blinking mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to a slow blinking speed.

The gaming machine of form A11 is the gaming machine described in form A10,
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is executed, and a period during which the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is being executed (for example, in FIG. 11-28 As shown in , the execution period of the late winning flash effect includes the period during which the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, and the execution period of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect. period),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first light emitting means emits light in a specific manner before and after the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A12 is the gaming machine according to form A10 or form A11,
The first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started, the first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner). When a certain variable display starts, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C1 and cycle T1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A12,
The display means displays a specific light emission effect compatible image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first display mode during the first period, and displays the specific light emission effect compatible image from the first display mode during the second period. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and when the winning period in the second period is During the execution period of the flash effect, the part that displays the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the first period, the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be displayed on the display means in the first display mode to make the player recognize the start of the specific light emission effect, and in the second period, the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be displayed in the first display mode. By displaying the image compatible with the specific light emitting effect in the second display mode by the means, the display means continues to display the image compatible with the specific light emitting effect in the first display mode, which obstructs other displays and reduces the interest in the game. It is possible to suppress the decline.

The gaming machine of form A14 is the gaming machine described in form A13,
The display means displays the specific light emission compatible image in a first display mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, (a portion for displaying the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A14,
comprising a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect corresponding to the specific light emission effect;
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first output mode during the first period, and does not output the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the second period, or outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect at a higher intensity than the first output mode. Output in the second output mode with a lower level (For example, as shown in Figure 11-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1. and during the execution period of the flash performance at the time of winning in the latter half, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output from speakers 8l and 8R at a volume of V2 (V1>V2)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the specific light emission effect has started, and it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the specific light emission effect has started. During execution, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect is not output or is output in the second output mode, so that it is possible to suppress a decline in game interest due to other effects being obstructed by the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect. .

The gaming machine of form A16 is the gaming machine described in form A15,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13). (a part that outputs a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A16,
The first light emitting means stops emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during a display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. (For example, in the modified example 135SG-1, as shown in FIG. 11-69, the production control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation command from the speakers 8L and 8R during the execution of the flash production at the time of late prize winning.) The pattern is confirmed by stopping the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect when winning a prize, turning off the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning a prize, hiding the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5, clearing the process timer for the flash effect when winning a prize in the later period, etc. During the period, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, the emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are not executed, and the first variable display start command is received. Based on this, by selecting the second-term winning flash production process table and resetting and starting the process timer for the second-term winning flash production, the second-term winning flash production (flash winning (The part that starts the output of the sound corresponding to the performance, the emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by temporarily stopping the light emission of the light emitting means, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the variable display is continuing.

The gaming machine of form A18 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A17,
A gaming machine capable of performing a re-variable display performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance) in which the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is displayed again.
The first light emitting means is configured to respond to the specific light emitting effect during a temporary stop when a re-variable display effect is executed during the second period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect is started. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-69 and FIG. 11-70(A) to FIG. 11-89(n) as modified example 135SG-1, the flash effect is the subject of winning.) During the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is executed before the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the variable display has ended even though it is temporarily stopped.

The gaming machine of form A19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A18,
A gaming machine capable of performing a re-variable display performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance) in which the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is displayed again.
The first light emitting means is
Even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the second period (for example, as modified example 135SG-1, FIGS. 11-69 and 11-70 (A ) ~ As shown in FIG. 11-89(n), even during the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at the brightness C1 and the cycle T2),
Even during a temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission continues in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as modification 135SG-1) As shown in Figures 11-69 and 11-70 (A) to Figure 11-89 (n), during the temporary suspension period of the decorative symbols in the variable display that are subject to the winning flash effect, the winning flash part of the lamp 135SG009F that continues to blink at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously believing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form A20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A16,
The first light emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during a display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. (For example, as shown in Figures 11-29 (A) to 11-48 (n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the later period, before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize is started) During the previous variable display pattern confirmation period, the part where the flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink when winning a prize),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by continuing to emit light during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period, the player's expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is targeted by the specific light emitting effect. It is possible to accurately maintain the variable display until the start of the variable display, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A21 is the gaming machine described in form A20,
The display means is capable of variably displaying first performance identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) and variable display of second performance identification information (for example, a small pattern) whose visibility is lower than that of the first performance identification information. A gaming machine,
During the result display period, the second production identification information in the stopped state is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-33 (J), during the symbol confirmation period, small symbols are displayed variably. (the part displayed when the is stopped),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the light emission continues during the result display period, the second performance identification information in the stopped state is displayed, so the player can be made aware that it is the result display period.

The gaming machine of form A22 is the gaming machine described in form A21,
The display means can display a specific light emission performance corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission performance in the second period so as not to overlap with the display of the second performance identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-33 (J)). As shown in FIG. 3, while the winning flash effect is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5. 1 display area 135SG005F (part displayed at the left end),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the end of the variable display due to the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect being displayed overlappingly with the display of the second effect identification information.

The gaming machine of form A23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A22,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance (for example, a reach performance of super reach) that suggests control to be in an advantageous state;
When the specific effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a manner according to the specific light emission effect until the specific effect is started, and When the performance starts, it starts emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific performance (for example, as shown in Figure 11-90 as modification 135SG-2, the super reach that is the target of the flash performance at the time of winning is variable). In the display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C2 and cycle T2 before the start of the super reach reach effect, and from the start timing of the super reach reach effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C2. part to light),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific performance is started, the light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific performance instead of in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission performance, so that the game interest of the specific performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A24 is the gaming machine described in form A23,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific effect start image corresponding to the start of the specific effect when the specific effect is started (for example, FIG. 11-96(K) to FIG. 11-98(O)). , as shown in FIGS. 11-104(K) to 11-106(O), a portion where the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (whiteout)),
The first light emitting means enters a low brightness state when the display of the display means switches to the specific effect start image, and after entering the low brightness state, emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 11-90, during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and then the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at brightness C2 from the start timing of the super reach reach effect.) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes with a low brightness state accompanying switching to the specific performance start image, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to these changes in the light emitting mode. Since this can be prevented, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A25 is the gaming machine described in form A23 or form A24,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The performance execution means includes, as the specific performance, a motion performance in which the movable body is moved at the start of the specific performance (for example, a movable body motion performance shown in FIG. 11-90), and suggests execution of the motion performance. It is possible to perform a motion suggestion performance (for example, a movable body motion suggestion performance shown in FIG. 11-90),
The first light emitting means enters a low brightness state when executing the action suggestion effect, and after entering the low brightness state, emits light in a manner corresponding to the action effect that is a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, , as shown in Figure 11-90, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect during the whiteout period, and the winning flash is turned off from the start timing of the super reach reach effect thereafter. The part that lights up the lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes with a low brightness state accompanying the execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to these changes in the light emitting mode. As a result, you can increase your interest in playing games.

The gaming machine of form A26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A25,
The first light emitting means is
When a special performance different from the specific light emission performance is executed by the performance execution means, it is possible to emit light in a manner corresponding to the special performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-108(A) as modification 135SG-3). (As shown in FIG. 1), when performing a step-up effect during a variable display in which a winning flash effect is not being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be lit in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect.
When the specific light emitting effect is started during the execution of the special effect, the light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect with priority over a manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, modification 135SG-3 As shown in Figure 11-108(B), if the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp is set in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect. 135SG009F continues to light up (flashing)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect from being started at an inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the special effect.

The gaming machine of form A27 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A26,
The first light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, when it ends at a first timing during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, and at a second timing after the first timing. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-119(A) and 11-119(B) as modification example 135SG-4, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F responds to the winning flash effect. The timing to end the light emission mode is the timing to start the movable body movement performance during the variable display that is the target of the flash performance when winning a prize, and the timing to start the reach performance of super reach),
When the light emission of the first light emitting means in a manner according to the specific light emission effect ends at the first timing, and when the light emission of the first light emitting means in a manner according to the specific light emission effect ends at the second timing. The rate at which the winning state is controlled to be advantageous differs depending on the end of the game. The expectation level of jackpot in the case where the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the movable body movement performance according to the light emission mode according to the movable body movement performance, and when the light emission mode is changed according to the said reach performance from the start timing of the reach performance. (different parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A28 is the gaming machine described in form A27,
The effect executed by the effect execution means at the time of the end of the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect is different depending on whether it ends at the first timing or when it ends at the second timing. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-119 as modification example 135SG-4, during the execution period of the movable body movement effect, depending on the timing of ending the light emitting mode according to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, In some cases, it may be during the execution period of Super Reach's reach effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize whether the end timing is the first timing or the second timing.

The gaming machine of form A29 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A28,
The performance execution means executes a first performance (for example, a movable body movement performance shown in FIG. 11-119 as a modification example 135SG-4) and a second performance different from the first performance (for example, a modification example 135SG-4) during variable display. -4, it is possible to execute the super reach reach performance shown in Figure 11-119),
The first light emitting means is
With the execution of the first effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change the light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the light emission mode in a mode corresponding to the first effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 11-119(A) as modification example 135SG-4, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the start timing of the movable body movement performance to the movable body. (The part that changes the lighting mode according to the motion effect),
With the execution of the second effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be changed to the light emission mode in a mode corresponding to the second effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 11-119(B) as modification example 135SG-4, the part that changes the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the start timing of the reach effect to the light emission mode according to the reach effect),
When changing from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode of light emission corresponding to the first effect, and when changing from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode of light emission corresponding to the second effect. The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled differs depending on the time (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-119(C) as a modified example 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed depending on the winning flash performance). The expectation level of jackpot is different depending on the case where the light emission mode is set from the start timing of the movable body movement performance to the light emission mode according to the movable body movement performance, and the case where the light emission mode is set from the start timing of the reach performance to the light emission mode according to the reach performance. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A28,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The performance execution means controls an action performance that causes the movable body to move (for example, a movable body motion performance), a motion suggestion performance that suggests execution of the motion performance (for example, a movable body motion suggestion performance), and an advantageous state. It is possible to carry out a specific performance (for example, a reach performance of super reach) that suggests that the
The first light emitting means is
With the execution of the action suggestion effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission can change from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect (for example, a modified example). As shown in 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode according to the movable body motion suggestion performance from the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion performance. part to be changed),
With the execution of the specific effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change the light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the light emission mode in a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, a modified example As shown in 135SG-4, a part that changes the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach effect from the start timing of the super reach reach effect. ),
The rate at which the light is controlled to an advantageous state is different when changing from a light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect and when changing to a light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, , as shown in Modified Example 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion performance according to the movable body motion suggestion performance. The part where the expectation level of jackpot differs depending on the lighting mode and the lighting mode depending on the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A31 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A30,
The display modes of the specific display include a normal mode (for example, display pattern α), a special mode (for example, display pattern δ and display pattern ε shown in FIG. 11-120 as modification 135SG-5), and a special mode (for example, display pattern β and display pattern γ).
The special aspect includes a first special aspect (for example, display pattern γ) and a second special aspect (for example, display pattern β) different from the first special aspect,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode (for example, in FIGS. 11-17 As shown in the figure, when the pending display or the active display is displayed in the display pattern γ, the part that is controlled to be in the jackpot gaming state at a higher rate than when it is displayed in the display pattern β),
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-120 as modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ or The part where the pending display or active display displayed in display pattern ε can be changed to the pending display or active display in display pattern β or display pattern γ),
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the percentage of execution of the specific light emitting effect is higher than when it is displayed in the special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 11 as Modification 135SG-5). As shown in 120, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, it is easier to win a prize than when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern β and the display pattern γ. (parts where flash effects are executed at a high rate),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a specific display is displayed in a special mode, by executing a specific light emitting effect at a high rate, it is determined whether the special mode changes to the first special mode or the second special mode. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to the game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A32 is the gaming machine described in form A31,
The special mode is a mode of a specific color (for example, blinking white as shown in FIG. 11-120 as modification example 135SG-5),
The special aspect is an aspect of a special color different from the specific color (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-17, blue or red),
The normal mode is a mode of a color other than the specific color and the special color (for example, white),
The specific display of the specific color changes to the special color at a higher rate when the specific light emitting effect is being executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not being executed (for example, Modified Example 135SG-5 As shown in , when a pending display or an active display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is displayed depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is executed. parts with different rates of change to pattern β and display pattern γ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the difference in the mode of specific display can be easily understood by the difference in color, and when a specific display of a specific color is displayed, the player pays attention to whether or not a specific light emitting effect is being executed. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A33 is the gaming machine described in form A31 or form A32,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a change suggestion effect that suggests that the specific display displayed in the special mode changes to the special mode in a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode. (For example, a part where the first effect and second effect shown in Modification Example 135SG-5 can be executed),
The special mode changes to the special mode at a higher rate when the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode than when it is executed in the first mode (for example, in Modified Example 135SG-5). As shown in , the second effect can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. The part that is a performance),
When the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode, the specific light emission effect is executed at a higher rate than when it is executed in the first mode (for example, in Modification 135SG-5). As shown, when the second effect is executed, the winning flash effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first effect is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the change suggestion effect is executed in the first mode or the second mode, and the change suggestion effect is executed in the first mode by executing the specific light emission effect. It is possible to increase expectations for the implementation in two ways.

The gaming machine of form A34 is the gaming machine described in form A33,
The special mode is a first special mode in which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is low (for example, the display pattern δ shown in FIG. 11-120 as modification 135SG-5). ), and a second special mode in which the rate at which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode and changes to the special mode is higher than that in the first special mode (for example, as modified example 135SG-5 in FIG. 11-120 The display pattern ε) shown in
When the specific display is displayed in the second special mode, the percentage of execution of the specific light emitting effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode (for example, when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode) When the display pattern ε is displayed, the percentage of flash effects executed at the time of winning is higher than when the specific display is displayed using the display pattern δ).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the specific display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and when the second special mode has a high rate of change to the special mode. Since the specific light emitting effect is executed at a high rate in the second special mode, expectations for the specific display being displayed in the second special mode can be increased by executing the specific light emitting effect.

The gaming machine of form A35 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A34,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific light emitting effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the specific light emitting effect so as to overlap a specific display corresponding to a variable display of a target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, As shown in modification example 135SG-7, a silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect when winning a prize can be displayed so as to overlap the active display in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect can be easily recognized by the player, and the specific display can be hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, giving the player a sense of surprise and increasing the enjoyment of the game. can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A36 is the gaming machine described in form A35,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of displays corresponding to the specific light emitting effect of different types (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-7, the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of displays corresponding to the specific light emitting effect of different sizes on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning). (portion where silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed),
The manner of overlapping with the specific display differs depending on the type of display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-129 (L) and FIG. 11-130 (N) as modification example 135SG-7). , a portion where the overlapping aspect of the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the displayed silhouette image 135SG005S)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a plurality of displays corresponding to specific light emitting effects are displayed, and the manner of overlapping with the specific display changes depending on the displayed display corresponding to specific light emitting effects, so that the game enjoyment can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A37 is the gaming machine described in form A35 or form A36,
The specific display includes a first specific display (for example, a pending display) corresponding to a variable display that has not been executed yet, and a second variable display (for example, an active display) that corresponds to a variable display that is being executed,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap with the first specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started. In addition, during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it can be displayed so as to overlap with the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-7, Before the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect is started, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the pending display that is the object of the winning flash effect that is displayed in the first holding memory display area 135SG005D. , while the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the active display that is the target of the winning flash effect that is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the first specific display and the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and not only the first specific display but also the second specific display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide even more surprises to the players and improve their enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of form A38 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A37,
A gaming machine capable of performing a re-variable display performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance) in which the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is displayed again.
The display means is capable of displaying a re-variable related display regarding the re-variable display performance, and also displays a specific light-emitting performance corresponding display corresponding to the specific light-emission performance during the specific light-emitting performance, overlapping with the re-variable related display. (For example, if a pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the winning flash effect, when the decorative pattern temporarily stops, it will stop in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. Special design (see Figure 11-40, etc.) where the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed overlappingly as a flash effect when winning a prize),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the re-variable related display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so it is possible to provide surprise to the player and improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A39 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A35 to A38,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIG. 11-28, FIG. 11-42(a) to FIG. 11-47( As shown in l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display that is the subject of the flash effect when winning a prize),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the interest of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A40 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A39,
The performance execution means is
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect ends at a predetermined time. It is possible to control the effect to end the light emission at the timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be activated before the start of the ready-to-win effect). flashes at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T2, and turns off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the start timing of the reach effect),
If the light emission of the first light emitting means in the manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect is not terminated at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the first light emitting means is not terminated at a specific end timing subsequent to the predetermined end timing. Perform special end control to end the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-22, the performance control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-reach performance of the variable display of the performance target due to the generation of static electricity, etc.) If this is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (timing at which the symbol confirmation command is received), which is a timing later than the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect, a second-term winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is performed again. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when light emission in a mode corresponding to a specific light emission effect is not normally completed.

The gaming machine of form A41 is the gaming machine described in form A40,
Equipped with a game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means is capable of transmitting variable display end information that notifies the end of the variable display to the effect execution means when the variable display ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4(A) , a part where the CPU 103 can send a symbol confirmation command that specifies the stop of the variable display of decorative symbols),
The performance execution means performs the specific end control based on receiving the variable display end information as the specific end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-22, the performance control CPU 120 The part that ends the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half based on receiving the command),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the sense of discomfort when ending light emission in a manner that corresponds to a specific light emission performance.

The gaming machine of form A42 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A39 to A41,
The predetermined end timing includes a first predetermined end timing and a second predetermined end timing. (portion where flash lamp 135SG009F can stop flashing),
The specific end timing is a timing later than the predetermined end timing and the second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-4, the effect control CPU 120 may cause the performance control CPU 120 to trigger the winning flash due to the generation of static electricity, etc. If it is not possible to stop the blinking of the lamp 135SG009F, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be started again at the end timing of the variable display, which is a timing later than the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect or the start timing of the reach effect. (The part that ends the flash performance when winning a prize in the second half)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the light emission cannot be ended at the second predetermined end timing, it is possible to end the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission performance at the specific end timing.

The gaming machine of form A43 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A42,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, a super reach performance) that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
If the predetermined condition is satisfied when the specific effect is being executed, the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. (The part that does not decide to execute the flash effect at the time of winning if a starting winning occurs in the mouth),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to a specific performance.

The gaming machine of form A44 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A43,
If the predetermined condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is equal to or shorter than the predetermined period, the effect execution means does not execute the specific light emitting effect, If the predetermined condition is satisfied for a period longer than the predetermined period, the specific light emission effect can be executed (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-8, when the first starting port is When a starting winning occurs, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is less than the execution period of the winning flash effect in the previous period, the execution of the winning flash effect is not determined),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific display of the target of the specific light emitting effect from becoming difficult to understand due to the specific light emitting effect being executed when the remaining period of the variable display is short.

The gaming machine of form A45 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A44,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests control to an advantageous state even in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figure 11-9, even in a variable display where the variable display result is a failure). The part where you can perform the super reach reach effect),
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state, the specific light emitting effect can be executed in response to the start of the next variable display of the variable display (for example, a modified As shown in Example 135SG-8, if a starting winning occurs at the first starting opening while the variable display is being executed, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. If it is less than the execution period, the winning flash effect can be executed from the start timing of the next variable display, provided that the variable display result of the variable display is a loss),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific effect and the specific light emission effect from becoming less interesting due to the specific effect and the specific light emission effect being executed overlappingly.

The gaming machine of form A46 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A45,
A specific area where the predetermined condition is satisfied when the game medium passes through (for example, the winning ball device 6A forming the first starting winning opening);
a specific light emitting means (for example, a starting port lamp 135SG009S) provided around the specific area and capable of emitting light in different light emission modes;
Equipped with
The display means can display the specific display in any one of a plurality of display modes that differ in the rate at which the specific display is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-17, a pending display or an active parts that can be displayed in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ with different jackpot expectations),
The specific light emitting means is capable of emitting light in a light emission mode corresponding to the display mode of the specific display regardless of whether or not the specific light emission effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, When the display pattern β or the display pattern γ is determined, the starting port lamp 135SG009S starts regardless of the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash effect or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, etc. (a portion that emits light in a color according to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of a winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific display can also be recognized by the light emission mode of the specific light emitting means provided around the specific area, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A47 is the gaming machine described in form A46,
The number of light emitting modes in which the specific light emitting means can emit light is greater than the number of light emitting modes in which the first light emitting means can emit light in the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-9, (a part where the number of light emitting modes of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission performance is greater than the number of light emitting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emission variations of the specific light emitting means are increased, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A48 is the gaming machine described in form A46 or form A47,
The light emitting area of the first light emitting means is larger than the light emitting area of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the light emitting area where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as a winning flash effect is , a portion provided larger than the light emitting area where the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light as a lighting effect of the starting port lamp),
The period during which the specific light emitting means emits light according to the display mode of the specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition of No. 1 is such that the first light emitting means emits light according to the specific light emission effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. (If it is decided to execute both the winning flash effect and the pending display notice effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will emit light after the starting winning occurs.) While the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the ready-to-win display on the variable display that is the target of the start-up winning flash display, the starting exit lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the ready-to-win display that is the target of the start winning flash display, while the start exit lamp 135SG009S displays the variable display that is the target of the pending display notice display (flash display when winning) after the start winning occurs. (the part that emits light until the end of the variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decline in game interest due to excessively long execution of light emission by the first light emitting means in accordance with the specific light emitting effect, and to prevent the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting means from becoming more advantageous. Players' expectations can be maintained for a long time.

The gaming machine of form A49 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A46 to A48,
Both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means are capable of blinking light emission (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in the section where the starting port lamp 135SG009S can flash),
The flashing cycle of the first light emitting means is different from the flashing cycle of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the flashing cycle of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S is set as a winning flash effect as a winning flash effect). Parts that differ from the blinking cycle of lamp 135SG009F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the blinking cycles are different, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 135SG)
Next, the feature section 135SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 135SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 135SG. As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this feature section 135SG, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F imitating the character A is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a winning ball device 6A A starting port lamp 135SG009S for causing the winning ball device 6A (first starting port) to emit light is provided near the starting port.

Further, a stick lamp 135SG009X for causing the stick controller 31A to emit light is provided in the stick controller 31A, and a button lamp 135SG009Y for causing the push button 31B to emit light is provided in the push button 31B. These stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135Sg009Y, together with the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d, constitute the game effect lamp 9 in the main feature section 135SG.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the starting port lamp 135SG009S, the stick lamp 135SG09X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y are connected to the lamp control board 14, and are used for performance control via the lamp control board 14. It can be turned on (flashing) under control from the CPU 120.

FIG. 11-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the feature section 135SG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 in the feature section 135SG constitutes a first display area 135SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 includes a first reservation memory display area 135SG005D in which the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed by the number of circular reservation displays, and a second reservation memory number of special symbols can be displayed by a circular reservation display. The second display area 135SG005Sa includes a second reserved storage display area 135SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of characters displayed, and a telop display area 135SG005T that can display telops indicating the game status, the performance being executed, etc.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 displays a fourth symbol 135SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first special symbol pending memory number, and a display of the second special symbol pending memory number. 3 display area 135SG005Sb.

Among these, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the center of the first display area 135SG005F, and it is possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns. It has become. Moreover, a small pattern 135SG005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F. The small patterns include the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the "right" decorative pattern display areas. The symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. Moreover, the small pattern 135SG005M is a pattern that is not hidden during variable display and is always displayed within the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the main characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. It is arranged at the left end of the 1 display area 135SG005F in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 135SG005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 135SG005A is provided at the lower center of the first display area 135SG005F in the main feature section 135SG for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

Hereinafter, in this characteristic section 135SG, the pending display and the active display may be collectively referred to as a specific display.

FIG. 11-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 135SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 11-4(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit", as shown in Figure 11-4 (B), for example. Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or not, the jackpot type (probable variable or non-probable variable), and a small hit as the winning determination result. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a fluctuation category command that indicates whether the random value for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. It is.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 11-4(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or some of these commands may not be included. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 11-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-5, in this feature section 135SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determining the display result of ordinary figures are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " 997'' range.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display device 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 11-6(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 135SG, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table being referenced.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature section 135SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 135SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more determination values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 135SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 135SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 11-6(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this feature section 135SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 135SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the first special figure game and the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 11-7(A) shows an example of the structure of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 135SG selects one of multiple jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 135SG using FIG. 11-7(B), in this feature section 135SG, high accuracy control and time saving control are set as jackpot types after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . The jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). . In addition, in the jackpot game state of "probable variable jackpot C" and "non-probable variable jackpot", rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

Although not particularly shown, the small winning game state in the feature section 135SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. It has become. Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

The high probability control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot are continuously performed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state occurs continuously without going through the normal state. , resulting in a so-called consecutive housing situation.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature section 135SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 11-7(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It hasn't been done yet. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special pattern game using the second special pattern, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a normal open jackpot state or a high speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds, such as "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a gaming state where game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state where few prize balls are obtained can be avoided. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 11-7(A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a special game or not, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a definite jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot type of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the type of jackpot may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 11-8 shows a variation pattern in the main feature section 135SG. In this feature section 135SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, the normal reach variation pattern includes a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect described below is not executed, and a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect described below is executed once, and a common normal reach variation pattern. is now executed. Furthermore, the super reach variation pattern includes a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed twice, which will be described later, and a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect, which will be described later, is executed three times. The performance is now executed. In other words, although this feature section 135SG exemplifies a form in which only one type of reach performance is provided as a normal reach reach performance and a super reach reach performance, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a plurality of reach effects may be provided as normal reach effects and super reach effects.

Incidentally, the variation pattern in this feature section 135SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 11-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 135SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, the normal reach variation patterns in this feature section 135SG include a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is not executed, in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and variable displayed again during a variable display, and a pseudo continuous effect is executed once during a variable display. There is a variation pattern. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is not performed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Furthermore, regarding the super reach variation patterns in this feature section 135SG, there are a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during a variable display, and a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during a variable display. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a shorter special symbol variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed 3 times during the variable display. .

In addition, in this characteristic section 135SG, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

In other words, regarding the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern in this feature section 135SG, the greater the number of times the pseudo continuous performance is executed during the variable display, the higher the jackpot expectation level becomes.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, as will be described later, the type of these fluctuation patterns is determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, etc. After that, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this characteristic section 135SG. In this feature section 135SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1-time jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach pseudo-continuous performance 2-time jackpot), PB1-4 (super It is determined from the variable pattern of reach pseudo consecutive performance 3 times jackpot). In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table B to change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1 Determined from -2 (Normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 1 time jackpot variation pattern), PB1-3 (Normal reach pseudo continuous performance 2 time jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Normal reach pseudo continuous performance 3 time jackpot variation pattern) .

As shown in FIG. 11-9, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B have different determination ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, Determine PB1-4 at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 20%. 4 at a rate of 45%. In other words, in this feature section 135SG, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot. Furthermore, when paying attention to the number of times pseudo-continuous effects are executed, when the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot, it is easier to execute many pseudo-continuous effects during the variable display than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. There is. Therefore, this feature section 135SG allows the player to pay attention to the variation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo continuous performance.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special win fluctuation pattern determination table, and use the special win fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the fluctuation pattern as PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern). do.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for miss, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), and PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1-time variation variation pattern). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using fluctuation pattern determination table C, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (time-saving shortening variation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), PA2-2 (variation pattern with 1 miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo-continuous performance 2 times) It is determined from PA2-4 (variation pattern of failure of 3 times of super reach pseudo consecutive performance).

In other words, when the variable display result in this feature section 135SG is "off", the special figure is displayed based on the fact that the number of pending memory of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or that the time is shortened. The rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1). This makes it possible to prevent the game from being delayed and shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in the feature section 135SG includes a game control data holding area 135SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The data holding area 135SG150 for game control shown in FIG. , a game control timer setting section 135SG153, a game control counter setting section 135SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 135SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 135SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B indicates that although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passage (approach) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, etc., extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage section 135SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern holding storage section 135SG151C stores the holding information of the normal pattern game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the common figure reservation storage unit 135SG151C associates the game balls with the pending numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 135SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 135SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 135SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 135SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 135SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, numerical data indicating random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, random numbers MR2 to MR4, is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 135SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 135SG190 as shown in FIG. 11-11(A), for example, as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. It is being The production control data holding area 135SG190 shown in FIG. 11-11(A) includes a production control flag setting section 135SG191, a production control timer setting section 135SG192, a production control counter setting section 135SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 135SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 135SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 135SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 135SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 135SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 135SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 135SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 135SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 135SG, data constituting a starting winning reception command buffer 135SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-11(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 135SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) is provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) is provided. When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 135SG194A are an area for storing these starting opening winning designation commands and a storage area for storing the symbol designating commands. Indicates the storage area, the area to store the variable category designation command, the area to store the pending storage number notification command, the area to store the pending display flag, and whether or not it is subject to the winning flash effect described later. A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the winning flash performance target flag and the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory in association with the number of pending memories. ing.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The content (data) of the pending memory for which the start condition has been met is copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B in FIG. will be deleted. Then, the storage contents of storage areas lower than the deleted reserved storage are shifted one by one to the storage areas higher up.

As described above, when the variable display of the pending memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is started, the active display buffer 135SG194B stores the content of the pending memory (for which the start condition is satisfied). data) is copied, so as shown in FIG. 11-11(C), a storage area similar to the starting winning reception command buffer 135SG194A is provided. In other words, there is an area for storing the starting opening winning designation command, an area for storing the symbol designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the pending storage number notification command, and an area for storing the pending display flag. , and an area for storing a winning flash effect flag indicating whether or not the winning flash effect is to be performed, which will be described later.

In this feature section 135SG, if a starting winning occurs when the variable display is not executed and there is no pending memory, a starting opening winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a holding The storage number notification command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B without passing through the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. Incidentally, the suspension display flag is set by the performance control CPU 120 executing a prefetch notice setting process (S161) to be described later.

The stored contents of the active display buffer 135SG194B are cleared (deleted) in the special figure waiting process executed when the variable display ends.

Note that the pending display flag is a flag indicating a display mode of an active display corresponding to a pending display or a variable display in progress. Although details will be described later, in this feature section 135SG, it is possible to suggest the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state by the display mode of these pending display and active display (value of the pending display flag).

Next, the starting prize winning determination process of the main feature section 135SG executed in step S101 in FIG. 6 will be explained based on FIGS. 11-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 135 SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 135SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 135SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting section 135SG154, for example. When the first special symbol pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 135SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 135SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 135SGS101a (step 135SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 135SGS101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the on state (step 135SGS101b; Y), the number of second special figure pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 135SGS105). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 135SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 135SGS105 (step 135SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 135SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 135SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 135SGS103 and step 135SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 135SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step 135SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 135SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 135SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (step 135SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage section according to the starting opening buffer value (step 135SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 135SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 135SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 135SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 135SGS110, transmission settings of a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (step 135SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the process of step 135SGS111, winning random value determination process is executed (step 135SGS112). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. Settings are made for (step 135 SGS 113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 135SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS115), and then the process of step 135SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 135SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS116), and then the starting winning prize is Finish the process. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 11-13(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS112 of FIG. 11-12 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 135SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 6) is performed to treat the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) as a "jackpot". A determination is made as to whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 6), a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value judgment process of step 135SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is decided whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the production control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 11-13(A), the CPU 103 first checks the status of the time saving flag and probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting section 135SG152, etc. The current gaming state in machine 1 is specified (step 135SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability state is in the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is in the on state, and specifies that the state is in the reduced time state when the variable variable probability flag is in the off state and the time saving flag is in the on state, and when both the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are in the state When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 135SGS121, special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 11-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS122). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 135SGS109 of FIG. 11-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 135SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the special figure display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 135SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not there is a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 135SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the variable display (step 135SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-6 2 is selected and set (step 135 SGS124). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 135SGS109 of FIG. 11-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 135SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a small hit in the variable display (step 135SGS125; Y), the variable display result will be a "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the 6th symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command according to the result (step 135SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 135SGS127), and proceed to step 135SGS138. .

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the variable display, a symbol will be displayed according to the variable display result being a "miss". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command, is executed (step 135SGS128), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (step 135SGS128). 135SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 135SGS129; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for failure, and if the time saving flag is on (step 135SGS129; Y), determine the variation pattern for failure. Table D is selected and set (step 135SGS131). The error variation pattern determination table A is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. Further, the losing variation pattern determination table D is a losing variation pattern determining table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed.

In addition to these fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure and fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure, this feature section 135SG also stores fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure, which is used when the number of pending memories is three. , an error variation pattern determination table C used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. 11-9, among these error variation pattern determination tables A to C. , In the variation pattern determination table A for misses, 600 judgment values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation patterns within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, and In the fluctuation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern out of the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take, and the fluctuation pattern determination table for outliers is assigned. In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern out of the possible range of the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach fluctuation pattern out of the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take. .

For this reason, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure in step 135SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach will always be non-reach or super reach even if the number of retained memories changes after the determination. Since this is a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing is used to determine the starting winning time.

In addition, if it is determined in step 135SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (step 135SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 11-13 (A), , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 135 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot B, and the third symbol specification command if it is a probability variable jackpot C. executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the 5th symbol designation command (step 135 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot. (Step 135 SGS134). If the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 135SGS134; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as the table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 135SGS135), and step Proceed to 135SGS138.

Further, when the determined jackpot type is a variable probability jackpot (step 135SGS134; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set (step 135SGS136), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS138.

After executing any of the processes in step 135SGS127, step 135SGS130, step 135SGS131, step 135SGS135, and step 135SGS136, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and a numerical value indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are Using the data, a fluctuation category is determined according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (step 135 SGS138). In this feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 11-13(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" regardless of the total number of pending memories. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach), It is sufficient if it can be determined based on the random value MR3 whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a variable category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 135SGS138 to the performance control board 12 (step 135SGS139), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

FIGS. 11-14 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 8 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 11-14, the production control CPU 120 first checks the storage contents of the production control command reception buffer, and receives the reception from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. It is determined whether there is a command (step 135 SGS 221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 135SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a received command in step 135SGS221 (step 135SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether the received command is the first starting opening winning designation command. (Step 135 SGS222).

If the received command is not the first starting slot winning designation command at step 135SGS222 (step 135SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting slot winning designation command (step 135SGS224).

If the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command at step 135SGS224 (step 135SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command (step 135SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step 135SGS226 (step 135SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 135SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS228).

If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at step 135SGS228 (step 135SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230).

If the received command in step 135SGS222 is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command in step 135SGS224 is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; Y), in step 135SGS226 If the received command is a symbol designation command (step 135SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; Y), then in step 135SGS228, the received command is the first pending storage number notification command. (135SGS228; Y), and in step 135SGS230, if the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; Y), the received command is transferred to the starting prize receiving command buffer 135SG194A shown in FIG. 11-11. It is stored at the beginning of the free area in the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS233), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

Specifically, in step 135SGS233, if there is no pending memory and variable display is not being executed, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B, and if there is pending memory or variable display is not being executed, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B. , the received command may be stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A.

In addition, if a pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), , the pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. That is, it is only necessary to sequentially store the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of a starting winning from the beginning of the empty area in the starting winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A.

If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step 135SGS230 (step 135SGS230; N), settings are made in accordance with other received commands (step 135SGS234), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis process of this feature section 135SG, if the received command is any one of the starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command, and pending storage number notification command, the received command is used at the starting winning time. Although an example is given in which the received command is sequentially stored from the beginning of the free space of the received command buffer 135SG194A, the present invention is not limited to this. If the received command is the 1st starting slot winning designation command, the command is used to notify the number of pending storage numbers. If a timer is set to wait for the reception of the number of pending memories, and if no pending memory number notification command is received before the timer times out, the pending memory of the entry that has not received the number of pending memory notification commands will be processed as described below. It may be set to be excluded from the reading preview performance.

Next, the production control process processing in the feature section 135SG will be explained. As shown in FIG. 11-15, in the production control process processing, the production control CPU 120 executes the prefetch notice setting process (step S161), and then displays the active display area 135SG005A, the first pending storage display area 135SG005D, and the second pending display area 135SG005A. A specific display start performance execution process (step 135SGS162) is executed to execute a specific display display start performance as a display start animation of the pending display in the storage display area 135SG005U and a display start animation of the active display in the active display area 135SG005A. In addition, after the specific display display start performance execution process, the performance control CPU 120 performs a winning flash performance execution process (step 135SGS163) to execute a winning flash performance after the specific display display start performance described above is completed. To execute a specific display rotation display effect (see Figures 11-19 (B-1) to Figure 11-19 (B-4)) as a rotation animation according to the value of the display mode flag of the pending display or active display. In the specific display rotating display effect execution process (step 135SGS164), when it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect as a pre-read notice in this feature section 135SG, a variable display based on the pending memory that is the target of the pending display notice effect is executed. A starting exit lamp light emitting performance execution process (step 135SG165) for executing a starting exit lamp light emitting performance that causes the starting exit lamp 135SG009S to emit light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the hold display/active display based on the hold memory until the end of the process (step 135SG165) and executes any one of steps S170 to S177.

Note that the specific display rotating display effect execution processing in this feature section 135SG includes processing for shifting each pending display to the next display position and displaying it as a rotating animation based on the start of the variable display, and processing for displaying the pending display as an active display. It also includes processing for shifting to the display area 135SG005A and displaying it as a rotating animation.

FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 161 of FIG. 11-15 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the prefetch notice setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A or the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS240) to determine whether there is an entry for which the display mode flag is not set. Determination is made (step 135SGS241). If there is no entry for which the display mode flag is not set (Step 135SGS241; N), the prefetch notice setting process ends; if there is an entry for which the display mode flag is not set (Step 135SGS241; Y), the prefetch notice setting process is already displayed. It is determined whether there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display preview effect as a pre-read preview effect is already being executed (step 135 SGS242). .

If there is no entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; N), it is further determined whether the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small hit (step 135SGS243). If the symbol designation command of the entry does not indicate a small hit (Step 135SGS243; N), the variable display result is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (Step 135SGS244a), and the variable category is specified from the fluctuation category command of the entry. (Step 135SGS244b). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display preview effect and the display pattern based on the specified variable display result and variable category (step 135SGS245).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-17, if the variable display result is off and the variable category is non-reach, there is a 95% chance that the pending display preview effect will not be executed (either pending display or active display). The display mode is decided to be the display pattern α) which is white, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect at a rate of 5% using the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or active display is blue), and 0%. It is decided to execute the hold display preview performance in the display pattern γ (the display mode of hold display or active display is red) at a ratio of .

In addition, if the variable display result is a failure and the variable category is other (normal reach), 80% of the time the pending display notice effect will not be executed (the display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white) ), and decided to execute the pending display preview effect at a rate of 20% in display pattern β (the display mode of pending display or active display is blue), and at a rate of 0%, execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern It is decided to execute the process in γ (the display mode of pending display or active display is red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a failure and the variable category is super reach, there is a 65% chance that the pending display notice effect will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white). It was decided to execute the pending display preview effect at a rate of 25% in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or active display is blue), and at a rate of 10%, the pending display preview effect was executed in the display pattern γ ( It is decided to execute the display mode of the pending display or active display in red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided that the pending display notice effect will not be executed at a rate of 15% (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white), and at a rate of 30%. It has been decided to execute the pending display preview effect in display pattern β (display mode of pending display or active display is blue), and the pending display preview effect is executed in display pattern γ (display mode of pending display or active display) at a rate of 55%. (in red).

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, when the pending display and active display are displayed in red, the probability that the target variable display result will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is highest, and when the pending display and active display are displayed in white. It is set so that the probability of the target variable display result being a loss is highest when the result is the highest (Jackpot expectation level according to the display color of the pending display or active display: red > blue > white).

Returning to FIG. 11-16, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the pending display preview performance in step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246). If it is decided in step 135SGS245 to execute the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS246; Y), a value (“1” or “2”) corresponding to the determined display pattern is set in the display mode flag of the entry ( Step 135SGS247), the prefetch notice setting process ends.

In addition, if there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2" (Step 135SGS242; Y), if the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small hit (Step 135SGS243; Y) If it is decided not to execute the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS246; N), set the display mode flag of the entry to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the ``drill'' display preview effect (step 135SGS248); The prefetch notice setting process ends.

Note that this feature section 135SG exemplifies a form that can be executed as a pending display preview performance by combining a pre-read preview performance that determines the display format of the pending display and a performance that determines the display format of the active display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to separately execute the pre-read preview effect that determines the display mode of the pending display and the effect that determines the display mode of the active display as different effects. good.

FIG. 11-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS162 of FIG. 11-15 as the specific display display start effect execution process. In the specific display display start performance execution process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether either the specific display display start performance A or the specific display display start performance B is being executed (step 135SGS251). In addition, whether or not specific display display start effect A or specific display display start effect B is being executed is determined by the process timer for specific display display start effect A or the process timer for specific display display start effect B, which will be described later. The determination may be made based on whether or not it is in operation.

If the specific display display start performance A or the specific display display start performance B is not being executed (step 135SGS251; N), it is determined whether the start winning designation command is received (whether the starting winning designation command reception flag is set or not). (step 135 SGS 252). If the start winning designation command is not received (step 135SGS252; N), the specific display display start performance execution process is ended. In addition, if a starting winning designation command has been received (step 135SGS252; Y), a newly generated pending memory entry is identified by referring to the starting winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B ( 263SGS273), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is reserved (step 135SGS253a). It should be noted that whether or not it is the first special figure pending storage may be determined based on the starting opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry (identified entry) is not the first special figure pending memory (step 135SGS253a; N), the process advances to step 135SGS255, and if the entry is the first special figure pending memory (step 135SGS253a; Y), the specified entry is It is determined whether the display mode flag of the entered entry is 0, that is, whether or not the entry is subject to the pending display preview performance (step 135SGS254). If the display mode flag of the specified entry is 0, that is, if the entry is not the target of the pending display preview performance (step 135SGS254; Y), the process advances to step 135SGS255.

In the process of step 135SGS255, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table for specific display display start effect A according to the display position of the specific display (pending display or active display). Then, a process timer for specific display display start effect A is started (step 135SGS256).

In addition, if the display mode flag of the specified entry is not 0, that is, if the entry is the target of the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS254; N), the display position of the specific display (pending display or active display) The corresponding process table for specific display display start effect B is selected (step 135SGS257). Then, a process timer for specific display display start performance B is started (step 135SGS258).

After executing Step 135SGS256 or Step 135SGS258, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device according to the contents of the process data 1 of the set specific display start effect process table (Step 135SGS259), and executes the specific display start effect execution process. finish.

Further, when the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is being executed (step 135SGS251; Y), the CPU 120 for effect control controls the specific display display start effect process timer (specific display display start effect) The value of the process timer for production A or the process timer for specific display display start production B) is -1 (step 135SGS260), and the value of the process timer for specific display display start production (the process timer for specific display display start production that is being executed) is decreased by -1 (step 135SGS260). It is determined whether the process timer) has timed out (step 135SGS261). If the process timer for the specific display display start performance that is being executed does not time out (step 135SGS261; N), the production device is controlled according to the content according to the process data of the process timer for the specific display display start performance that is currently being executed. (Step 135SGS262), the specific display display start effect execution process ends.

In addition, if the process timer for the specific display start effect that is being executed times out (step 135SGS261; Y), whether the process timer for the specific display start effect is the last process timer for the specific display start effect or not. (Step 135SGS263). When the last specific display display start effect process timer times out (step 135SGS263; Y), the specific display display start effect is ended (step 135SGS267), and the specific display display start effect execution process is ended. If the process timer for the last specific display start effect has not timed out (step 135SGS263; N), the process data is switched, the process timer for the next specific display start effect is started, and the process timer for the next specific display start effect is started. The presentation device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the display start presentation process timer (step 135SGS264, step 135SGS265, step 135SGS266), and the specific display display start presentation execution process is ended.

As described above, in this feature section 135SG, if a starting prize has occurred and it is decided not to perform a pre-read preview performance (pending display preview performance) based on the starting winning, or if the starting winning is the second In the case of a starting prize in the starting opening, as shown in Figure 11-19 (A), Figure 11-19 (B), Figure 11-19 (B-1) to Figure 11-19 (B-4). , at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the active display area 135SG005A or the pending memory display areas 135SG005D, 135SG005U, an appearance animation in which the pending display (active display) gradually appears from the bottom to the top is displayed as the specific display display start effect A. Ru.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the period from the occurrence of a starting prize to the end of the appearance animation of the pending display (active display) as the specific display display start effect A is about 0.2 seconds. Then, the pending display (active display) after the end of the specific display display start effect A is the same as the other pending displays and active displays as the above-mentioned specific display rotation display effect, in the active display area 135SG005A or in the pending memory display area 135SG005D, 135SG005U. Shifts to a rotating animation display.

In addition, if a starting prize has occurred, and it has been decided to execute a pre-read notice performance (pending display notice performance) based on the starting prize, and the starting prize is a starting prize in the first starting gate, As shown in FIGS. 11-20(A) to 11-20(C) and FIGS. 11-20(C-1) to 11-20(C-4), first, as specific display display start effect B, On the image display device 5, an animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed. After the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the variable display is executed at the timing of the start winning, or if the first special figure pending memory already exists, the character A An animation of moving to the 1 pending storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. At this time, the character A is displayed overlapping a part of the active display area 135SG005A in the process of moving to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D.

Then, when the character A moves to the first reservation storage display area 135SG005D, as shown in FIGS. 11-20 (C-1) to 11-20 (C-4), the character A An animation that attacks (acts on) the position where the hold display is displayed is displayed. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which a hold display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In this feature section 135SG, the period from the occurrence of a starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the position where the pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed as the specific display display start effect B is The duration is approximately 1 second, and the period from the end of the animation to the end of the appearance animation of the suspended display is approximately 0.2 seconds. In other words, when performing specific display display start effect B targeting the pending display of the first special drawing, it takes 1.2 seconds from the occurrence of a starting prize to the completion of the display of the pending display based on the starting winning. It takes. Then, the hold display after the end of the specific display display start effect B transitions to a rotating animation display in the first hold memory display area 135SG005D as the above-mentioned specific display rotation display effect, similar to other hold displays and active displays. .

In addition, when the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the specific display display start effect B, if the variable display is not executed at the timing of the start winning and the first special figure pending memory does not exist. An animation in which character A moves to active display area 135SG005A is displayed. Then, when the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A, the active display is displayed based on the starting prize, as in Figures 11-20 (C-1) to 11-20 (C-4). An animation of attacking (acting) on the active display area 135SG005A is displayed. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In this feature section 135SG, the period from the occurrence of a starting prize to the end of the animation in which character A attacks the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display display start effect B is about 0.5 seconds, The period from the end to the end of the appearance animation of the active display is approximately 0.2 seconds. That is, when performing the specific display display start performance B targeting the active display, it takes 0.7 seconds from the occurrence of a starting prize to the completion of the display of the active display based on the starting winning. Then, the active display after the end of the specific display display start performance B shifts to a rotating animation display in the active display area 135SG005A as the above-described specific display rotation display performance.

11-21 and 11-22 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS163 of FIG. 11-21 as the winning flash effect execution process. In the winning flash performance execution process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the starting winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS272), and displays the starting winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B. It is determined whether there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display preview effect is being executed (step 135SGS273).

If there is an entry in which the display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS273; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the entry is based on a winning start at the first starting opening. It is determined whether or not (step 135SGS274). It should be noted that whether or not the entry is based on a starting prize in the first starting hole may be determined from the starting hole winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry is an entry based on a starting prize into the first starting opening (step 135SGS274; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the gaming state is the normal state or not (step 135SGS275). If the gaming state is the normal state (step 135SGS275; Y), it is further determined whether the value of the production control process flag is between 0 and 3, that is, whether the gaming state is the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. It is determined whether or not (step 135SGS276). If the value of the production control process flag is one of 0 to 3 (step 135SGS276; Y), the fluctuation category of the entry (the entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2") is super. It is determined whether it is reach (step 135SGS277).

If the variable category of the entry is super reach (step 135SGS277; Y), it is determined whether the value of the production control process flag is 2, that is, whether variable display is being executed (step 135SGS278). When the value of the performance control process flag is 2 (step 135SGS278; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the ready-to-win performance is being executed (step 135SGS279). It should be noted that whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed may be determined based on the contents of the variable display process data.

If the value of the performance control process flag is not 2 (step 135SGS278; N) or if the reach performance is not being executed (step 135SGS279; N), the performance control CPU 120 executes the winning flash performance based on the variable display result.・Determine non-execution. Incidentally, the variable display result may be specified from the symbol designation command of the entry for which the winning flash effect flag is not set.

As shown in FIG. 11-24, if the variable display result is a loss, execution of the winning flash effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and non-execution of the winning flash effect is determined at a rate of 90%. Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot, execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 20%, and non-execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 80%.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, when the winning flash effect is executed from the start winning time, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set higher than when the winning flash effect is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 11-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the winning flash effect (step 135SG279b). If it has been decided to execute the winning flash effect (Step 135SG279b; Y), the winning flash effect flag of the entry (the entry for which the winning flash effect flag is not set) is set as the target of the winning flash effect. is set to "1" indicating that it is a pending memory (step 135SG280), and the winning flash effect execution flag is turned on (step 135SG280a). The process table for the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period is selected, the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period is started, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 (steps 135SGS281 to 135SGS283), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

As shown in Figure 11-23, the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period is the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period for 1.5 seconds from the occurrence of the start winning by the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning the prize and the game effect lamp 9. (As shown in FIGS. 11-26(A) and 11-26(B), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are lit at high brightness C1. This is a performance that causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output a sound corresponding to the winning flash performance at a volume V1, and displays the effect image 135SG005E of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. In addition, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect in this feature section 135SG is the sound corresponding to the first winning flash effect that is output during the execution of the first winning flash effect, and the second winning flash effect that is output during the execution of the second winning flash effect. When the flash is produced, it is divided into corresponding sound and sound. Among these, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, a sound having a relatively short output period (for example, 1 second), such as an electronic sound or the voice sound of a specific character, may be output once. Further, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, it is sufficient to repeatedly output a sound having a longer output period than the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the earlier period, such as dedicated BGM or SE (sound effect). In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 135SG, in addition to the above-mentioned sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, a plurality of effect sounds such as the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display, which will be described later, are generated in different ways using different channels. Simultaneous output from speakers 8L and 8R is possible depending on the volume.

In addition, if the entry is an entry based on winning the second starting slot (step 135SG274; N), and if the gaming state is not the normal state (step 135SG275; N), the performance control process flag is either 0 to 3. If not (Step 135SG276; N), if the variable category of the entry is not Super Reach (Step 135SG277; N), if the reach effect is being executed (Step 135SG279; Y), do not execute the flash effect when winning a prize. If it is determined (Step 135SG279b), the winning flash performance target flag of the entry is set to "0" indicating that it is not eligible for the winning flash performance (Step 135SG279c), and the winning flash performance execution process is executed. finish.

In addition, when the winning flash effect execution flag is on in step 135SGS271 (step 135SGS271; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer for the previous winning flash effect is in operation (step 135SGS271; Y). 135SGS284). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is operating (Step 135SGS284; Y), the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is -1 (Step 135SGS285), and the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is decreased by 1, and then the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is activated. It is determined whether the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning has timed out (step 135SGS286). If the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period has not timed out (step 135SGS286; N), the performance control CPU 120 operates the performance device according to the process data of the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period which is being executed. control (step 135SGS287), and proceeds to step 135SGS292.

Further, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period has timed out (step 135SGS286; Y), it is determined whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last period winning has timed out (step 135SGS288). If the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the last previous period has not timed out (step 135SGS288; N), the performance control CPU 120 switches the process data and starts the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the next previous period. Then, the production device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the process timer for the flash production at the time of winning in the next first period (step 135SGS289, step 135SGS290, step 135SGS291), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

Then, in step 135SGS292, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. is controlled to flash in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. In addition, a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS293), and the winning flash effect execution process is ended. In addition, as a mode corresponding to the first-term winning flash performance, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly emitted in white or red. In addition, the modes corresponding to the flash performance when winning are the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the flash when winning. It is sufficient to cause the lamp 135SG009F to emit light in the same color.

Further, in step 135SGS288, when the process timer for the last first-term winning flash effect times out (step 135SGS288; Y), the performance control CPU 120 ends the first-term winning flash effect (step 135SGS294). Then, the process table for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half is selected, the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half is started, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 (steps 135SGS294 to 135SGS297), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

As shown in Figure 11-23, the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half is the period from the end of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period to the start timing of the reach performance of the super reach in the target variable display, when the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning the prize is turned on during the period from the end of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period to the start timing of the reach performance in the target variable display. A silhouette image of the character A imitated by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5 by blinking in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect and outputting a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1. This is an effect that displays 135SG005S. As a mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half, the lamp 135SG009F for flash at the time of winning may repeatedly emit light in white or red in the same way as the flash performance at the time of winning in the first half. In addition, since the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the second half is performed at a lower brightness than the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the first half (see Figure 11-28), the light emitting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning the prize in the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the latter stage is as follows. The light will be emitted in a darker color than the flash effect during the previous period.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-27(A), the game effect lamp 9 (particularly the frame lamp 9b) has a brightness C2, which is lower than the brightness C1 described above, during the period excluding the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. The light turns on and off (flashing) repeatedly. In particular, the blinking cycle at brightness C2 is longer than the blinking cycle when executing the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, and during the blinking, as shown in Figures 11-27 (B) to 11-27 (D) Thus, the frame lamp 9b is configured to blink while changing the emitted light color in stages at a plurality of locations in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. Therefore, the game effect lamp 9 during a period other than the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the previous period gives a lower impression to the player than the game effect lamp 9 during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the previous period.

In addition, if the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period is not operating in step 135SGS284, that is, if the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second period is in operation (step 135SGS284; N), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance The value of the winning flash performance process timer is decreased by 1 (step 135SGS298), and it is determined whether the latter winning flash performance process timer that has been decremented by 1 has timed out (step 135SGS299). If the process timer for the flash performance at the time of late prize winning has not timed out (step 135SGS299; N), the performance device is controlled according to the process data of the process timer for the flash performance at the time of late prize winning which is being executed (step 135SGS300). ), proceed to step 135 SGS307.

Then, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period has timed out (step 135SGS299; Y), it is determined whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last winning event in the latter period has timed out (step 135SGS301). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the last latter period has not timed out (step 135SGS301; N), the process data is switched, the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the next latter period is started, and the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the next latter period is started. The production device is controlled according to the content (steps 135SGS302 to 135SGS304), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

In addition, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last late winning time has timed out (step 135 SGS301; Y), the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first late winning time is started, and the effect device is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 ( Step 135SGS305, step 135SGS306) and step 135SGS307 are proceeded to.

In step 135SGS307, the performance control CPU 120 controls the winning flash lamp 135SG009F to blink in a manner corresponding to the late winning flash performance. In addition, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1 (step 135SGS308).

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 checks the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS309), and determines whether the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1", that is, the variable display being executed. It is determined whether or not is a variable display subject to a flash effect at the time of winning (step 135SGS310). When the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "0" (step 135SGS310; N), the winning flash performance execution process is ended. If the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1" (step 135SGS310; Y), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ready-to-win performance (step 135SGS311).

If it is the start timing of the reach effect (step 135SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, turns off the flash effect in progress at the time of winning (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), The flash effect execution process ends.

Moreover, when it is not the start timing of the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a symbol confirmation command is received (step 135SGS311a). If the symbol confirmation command is received (Step 135SGS311a; Y), the flash performance at the time of winning is ended in the second half, the flash performance execution flag at the time of winning is turned off (Step 135SGS312, Step 135SGS313), and the flash performance execution process is executed at the time of winning. finish. If no symbol confirmation command is received (step 135SGS311a; N), the winning flash effect execution process is ended without executing the processes of step 135SGS312 and step 135SGS313.

As described above, the first period winning flash performance in this feature section 135SG is a performance that ends when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed, while the second period winning flash performance is a performance This is a performance that is repeatedly executed without ending every time a certain period of time elapses until the start timing of the reach performance of the variable display of the target.

In addition, if the performance control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win performance of the variable display of the performance target during the execution of the flash performance at the time of late winning, due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the start timing of the ready-to-win performance will be determined. At the end timing of the variable display (timing of receiving the symbol confirmation command), which is a later timing, it is possible to finish the flash effect at the time of winning a second time including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning anew.

In addition, as shown in step 135SGS281 in FIG. 11-21 and step 135SGS295 in FIG. 11-22, in this feature section 135SG, the performance control CPU 120 uses a process table for performance 1 as a process table for flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period. , and select the production process table 1 as the process table for flash production at the time of winning in the second half. In other words, the performance pattern (performance period) for the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period and the flash performance at the time of winning in the second period of this feature section 135SG is always the same in the same performance mode and the same performance period when winning in the first period, regardless of the number of retained memories etc. A flash effect and a flash effect when winning a prize in the latter half are executed.

FIG. 11-25 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process process. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts each value of the process timer, variable time timer, and variable control timer by 1 (step 135SGS351, step 135SGS352, step 135SGS353). Note that the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are timers that are set in the variable display start setting process.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356). If the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356; Y), the process data is switched (step 135SGS357). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table set in the variable display start setting process to the process timer (step 135SGS358). Further, the control state for the production device (production component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. set next (step 135SGS359). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (step 135SGS356; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) The performance device (performance component) is controlled according to the following (step 135SGS360).

In particular, as the control contents of steps 135SGS359 and 135SGS360, the production control CPU 120 outputs variable display compatible sound corresponding to the variable display being executed from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 smaller than the volume V1 (step 135SGS361). Note that the variable display compatible sound in the feature section 135SG refers to BGM that corresponds to the background image displayed on the image display device 5, BGM that corresponds to the number of pseudo-sequential performances performed during variable display, and the like. In addition, when the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period is not executed (step 135SGS362; N), the flashing control is performed in a manner according to the variable display being executed on the game effect lamp 9 (step 135SGS363), while the flash at the time of winning in the previous period While the performance is being executed (step 135SGS362; Y), the game effect lamp 9 is not controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed (as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, the game effect lamp 9 is The lamp 9 is controlled to flash in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a preview performance execution process (step 135SG364). In the preview performance execution process, for example, at the time when the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting process, it is determined whether or not to execute the preview performance while the variable display is being executed, and in which performance pattern the preview performance is executed. It is only necessary to decide in advance whether or not the event will be announced, and to be able to execute the preview performance according to the result of the determination. In addition, when determining the performance pattern of the preview performance in the variable display start setting process described above, one performance pattern is determined from a plurality of performance patterns at different ratios depending on the variable display result, so that the preview performance is The rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled may be made different depending on whether the performance pattern is executed.

The performance executed as a preview performance in the feature section 135SG is a dialogue preview performance in which characters' lines are displayed on the image display device 5, and the jackpot expectation level varies depending on the displayed lines.

Further, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365; Y), the production control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the left-center right decorative symbol (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed from the previous display switching point of the decorative symbol). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written into a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 135SGS366). In this way, variable display control of decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 sends to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this way, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the variable display of decorative patterns are displayed on the image display device 5. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 135SGS367).

Further, if the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 135SGS365; N) or after executing step 135SGS366, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 135SGS368). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation command has been received is set (step 135SGS369; Y), the value of the production control process flag is changed to special symbol hit waiting processing. (Step S173) is updated to a value corresponding to (Step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if a pattern confirmation command is received, the control will shift to stopping the variable display, so for example, a variation pattern designation command that indicates a long variation time due to noise between boards, etc. Even in such a case, when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol), the variable display of the decorative symbol can be ended.

Incidentally, process data during variable display of the decorative pattern is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer setting values of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer for the last process data n times out in the process of step 135SGS356, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the effect control of the decorative pattern based on the process table is finish.

Next, the operation mode of each production device when executing the winning flash production in the feature section 135SG will be explained based on FIGS. 11-28 to 11-68. First, FIG. 11-28 is a timing chart in the case where a starting winning occurs during execution of the variable display, and it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the starting winning. Furthermore, Figure 11-28 shows both the case where the execution of the winning flash effect is decided based on the starting winning and the execution of the pending display notice effect is also decided, and the case where the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is decided. 2 is a corresponding timing chart. FIGS. 11-29 to 11-48 show the image display device 5 when a starting winning occurs during execution of the variable display, and based on the starting winning, it is decided to execute the pending display preview effect and the winning flash effect. It is a diagram showing the effect mode in the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. Figures 11-49 to 11-68 show that a starting winning occurs while the variable display is being executed, and based on the starting winning, it is decided to execute the winning flash effect, while it is decided not to execute the pending display preview effect. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the image display device 5 and the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of a prize win.

In addition, in "When it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect" shown in Figures 11-29 to 11-48, the display mode of the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is display pattern β or This is a case where the display pattern γ is displayed (displayed as a blue or red circle), and as shown in Figures 11-49 to 11-68, "While the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided, the pending display notice "When it is decided not to perform the performance" refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display that is the object of the flash performance at the time of winning is displayed in the display pattern α (displayed in a white circle).

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-29 (A), while the variable display is being executed, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of decorative patterns, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the variable display. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. In addition, while the variable display is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (Figures 11-27 (A) to 11-27 (Blinking in the manner shown in (D)) is controlled.

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the preview performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R are displaying the image of the preview performance. A sound corresponding to the performance pattern (for example, a sound corresponding to a preview performance such as a sound of a character speaking the characters displayed on the image display device 5) is output at a volume V2. Further, as the pending memory, there are three first special figure pending memories (three pending displays are displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D).

If a prize is won in the first starting slot (starting prize) during such a variable display, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the figure As shown in FIG. 11-28 and FIG. 11-29 (B), a flash effect is started at the time of first-term winning.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-29 (B), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 (V1>V2) for the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, 11-30(C), and 11-30(D), the display of the effect image 135SG005E starts from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG009X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the first period winning flash effect is started, as shown in Figure 11-30 (D), Figure 11-31 (E), and Figure 11-31 (F), as the above-mentioned specific display display start effect B. , An animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. After the character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed (if it is the main characteristic part 135SG, the fourth pending display is displayed). An animation that attacks (acts on) is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display that is the target of the winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) that is currently being executed appears gradually from the bottom to the top at the position where the action took place. An appearance animation is displayed (see Figures 11-20 (D-1) to 11-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display whose appearance animation has been completed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display as a specific display rotating display effect like other pending displays.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if a starting winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the starting winning, the display is performed before the display of the pending display based on the starting winning is completed. At this time, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. In addition, the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display display start effect B in this feature section 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period (Fig. 11-32 (G) and Fig. 11 -32(H)).

When the first-term winning flash performance ends, the second-term winning flash performance starts from the end timing. As for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half, as shown in Figures 11-28, 11-32 (G) and 11-32 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2 (period T2>period T1). Further, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

In addition, at the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period and the start timing of the flash performance at the time of winning in the second period, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emitting mode (blinking at brightness C1 and cycle T1) of the attacker lamp 9c and movable lamp 9d) corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y corresponds to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. The display switches to the corresponding mode (blinking at brightness C2 and period T0 shown in FIGS. 11-27(A) to 11-27(D)). In other words, the lighting mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. Returns to the lighting mode before the start of the flash performance when winning a prize in the previous period. Incidentally, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y remain off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter half.

In addition, as described above, the blinking of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d) with the brightness C2 and period T0, excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y, is as follows. The same mode as the mode before the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (the light emission mode shown in FIG. 11-29(A)) is the color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image). A gradation using blue-based colors, a gradation using red-based colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.) are performed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1, but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (lamp blinking cycle length: T0>T2). >T1). Incidentally, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the latter half, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (H), 11-33 (I), and 11-33 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with a transparent black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed over the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A. The silhouette image 135SG005S in the main characteristic portion 135SG is displayed in blue so that it can be easily recognized by the player when displayed overlappingly with the black image 135SG005B.

Note that in this feature section 135SG, an example is given in which the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in blue so that it is easily visible to the player when displayed overlappingly with the black image 135SG005B, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed in a color other than blue, such as green or red. In particular, when the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in multiple colors such as the aforementioned blue, green, and red, the jackpot expectation level may be changed depending on which color the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. good. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the color of the silhouette image 135SG005S, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (H) and 11-33 (J), in this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device A small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of 5. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed overlappingly, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. Regardless of whether or not the variable display is being executed, it is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M.

As shown in FIG. 11-33 (J), FIG. 11-34 (K), and FIG. 11-34 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the image display device 5 displays the decorative symbol and The small symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination that indicates an error (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in this feature section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is the symbol confirmation period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 11-33 (J), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R are When winning a prize, a sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the pending display displayed at the beginning in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display, and is also displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted to the right one by one. Furthermore, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (K) to 11-41 (Z), in the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the speaker 8L, which is the flash performance during the later winning time, The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at the volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in Figures 11-38 (S) to 11-40 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (Figure 11-40 (W) ) Refer to this characteristic section 135SG. In the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, a decorative pattern indicating a normal number is temporarily stopped, and a special pattern indicating a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the decorative pattern display area 5C inside. ), as a flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half, output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, the brightness of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning and blinking at the cycle T2, and the image display device 5. The silhouette image 135SG005S of is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (Y) and 11-41 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is off due to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the decorative patterns and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in the present feature section 135SG is also executed during the symbol determination period of the variable display when the normal reach is off. That is, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (Y) and 11-41 (Z), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at a volume of V2.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-40 (W) and 11-40 (X), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are not activated. Light is emitted in a light emitting manner corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if it is the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern in the variable display, light is emitted in blue at brightness C2), and the background image is displayed based on the execution of the variable display again. Returns to the light emission mode according to . Furthermore, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-42(a) and 11-42(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, and the The pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIG. 11-43(c) to FIG. 11-47(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Further, during variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIGS. 11-43(d) and 11-44(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figure 11-45 (g) to Figure 11-46 (j) reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 11-46 (j)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a late winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C2 and period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 11-45(g) and FIG. 11-46(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are not connected to the decorative pattern. The light is emitted in a lighting mode corresponding to the temporary stop (for example, if it is the first temporary stop, the light is emitted in blue at brightness C2, and if it is the second temporary stop, it is green at brightness C2), and the display is re-variable. Based on this, the light emission mode returns to the one corresponding to the background image. Although not shown in the feature section 135SG, if the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during variable display, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacker The lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emitting manner (for example, red at brightness C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and emit light in accordance with the background image based on execution of variable display again. Return to aspect.

As shown in FIGS. 11-48(m) and 11-48(n), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F once whites out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white), then the ready-to-reach effect is started. In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, thereby suggesting that a super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the whiteout timing, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

Also, at the whiteout timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y end blinking at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0. . The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d remain off during the whiteout period.

That is, during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d remain off. Then, from the timing when the whiteout ends, in accordance with the above-mentioned reach effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d respond to the reach effect. The light emission mode (lighting at brightness C1) starts.

Further, during the whiteout period, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and there is no sound, and from the timing when the whiteout ends, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, At the same time that the attacker lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d begin to emit light (lighting at brightness C1) in accordance with the reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R begin outputting the sound corresponding to the reach effect, which is the sound that corresponds to the reach effect. . In addition, as the sound corresponding to the reach effect in this feature section 135SG, BGM, etc., which is different from the sound corresponding to the variable display, must be output so that the player can recognize that the reach effect (super reach effect) is in progress. Bye.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-28, if a starting prize occurs during the execution of the variable display, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect based on the starting winning, the corresponding starting entrance lamp lighting effect will be displayed. From the timing of the starting winning, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, blue if the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern β, and the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern γ). (in red), the light starts emitting light.

The light emission of the starting port lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the winning flash effect described above, and regardless of the blinking mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F or the game effect lamp 9, the above-mentioned starting Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice performance is continued from the time of winning to the end of the target variable display of the start lamp light emission performance (target variable display of the flash performance at the time of winning).

Next, a case will be described in which the execution of the pending display preview performance is not determined together with the flash performance at the time of winning in the starting winning while the variable display is being executed.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-49 (A), while the variable display is being executed, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of decorative patterns, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the variable display. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. In addition, while the variable display is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (Figures 11-27 (A) to 11-27 (Blinking in the manner shown in (D)) is controlled.

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the preview performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R are displaying the image of the preview performance. A sound corresponding to the performance pattern (sound corresponding to the preview performance) is output at volume V2. Further, as the pending memory, there are three first special figure pending memories (three pending displays are displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D).

If a prize is won in the first starting slot (starting prize) during such a variable display, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the figure As shown in FIG. 11-28 and FIG. 11-49 (B), a flash effect is started at the time of first-term winning.

First, as shown in Figures 11-28 and 11-49 (B), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 (V1>V2) for the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, 11-50(C), and 11-50(D), the display of the effect image 135SG005E starts from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the first period winning flash effect is started, as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), Figure 11-50 (C), and Figure 11-50 (D), as the above-mentioned specific display display start effect A. , an appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect (previous period winning flash effect) is gradually appearing from the bottom to the top (Figure 11-19 (B-1) to Figure 11-19 (See (B-4)). Note that the pending display whose appearance animation has been completed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display as a specific display rotating display effect like other pending displays.

In particular, when the specific display display start effect A is executed together with the winning flash effect, the appearance animation of the pending display ends when the effect image 135SG005E is still being displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the above-described specific display display start effect B is executed together with the winning flash effect, the appearance animation of the pending display ends after the display of the effect image 135SG005E ends on the image display device 5 (Fig. 11-29~ (See Figure 11-32). In other words, when specific display display start effect A is executed, the display of the pending display (appearance animation) is completed at an earlier timing than when specific display display start effect B is executed, and the transition to rotation animation is started. There is.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if a starting winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the starting winning, the display is performed before the display of the pending display based on the starting winning is completed. At this time, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. Incidentally, the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display display start effect A in the present feature section 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period.

When the first period winning flash effect ends, the second period winning flash effect starts from the end timing. As for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half, as shown in Figures 11-28, 11-52 (G) and 11-52 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2 (period T2>period T1). Furthermore, display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

In addition, at the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period and the start timing of the flash performance at the time of winning in the second period, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emitting mode (blinking at brightness C1 and cycle T1) of the attacker lamp 9c and movable lamp 9d) corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y corresponds to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. The display switches to the corresponding mode (blinking at brightness C2 and period T0 shown in FIGS. 11-27(A) to 11-27(D)). In other words, the lighting mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. Returns to the lighting mode before the start of the flash effect when winning a prize in the previous period. Incidentally, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y remain off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter half.

In addition, as described above, the blinking of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d) with the brightness C2 and period T0, excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y, is as follows. The same mode as the mode before the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (the light emission mode shown in FIG. 11-29(A)) is the color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image). A gradation using blue-based colors, a gradation using red-based colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.) are performed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1, but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (lamp blinking cycle length: T0>T2). >T1). Incidentally, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the latter half, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-52 (H), 11-53 (I), and 11-53 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with a transparent black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed over the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 11-52 (H) and 11-53 (J), in this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device A small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of 5. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed overlappingly, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. Regardless of whether or not the variable display is being executed, it is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M.

As shown in FIG. 11-53 (J), FIG. 11-54 (K), and FIG. 11-54 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the image display device 5 displays decorative symbols and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in this feature section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is the symbol confirmation period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 11-53 (J), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R are When winning a prize, a sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the pending display displayed at the beginning in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display, and is also displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted to the right one by one. Furthermore, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 11-54 (K) to 11-61 (Z), in the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the speaker 8L, which is the flash performance during the later winning time, The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at the volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in Figures 11-58 (S) to 11-60 (X), in the variable display in which pseudo-continuous effects are executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (Figure 11-60 (W) ) Refer to this characteristic section 135SG. In the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, a decorative pattern indicating a normal number is temporarily stopped, and a special pattern indicating a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the decorative pattern display area 5C inside. Also, as a flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half, output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, the brightness of the lamp 135SG009F for the winning flash at the time of winning at the brightness C2 and blinking at the cycle T2, and the image display device 5 Display of silhouette image 135SG005S is executed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-61 (Y) and 11-51 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is off due to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the decorative patterns and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in the present feature section 135SG is also executed during the symbol determination period of the variable display when the normal reach is off. That is, as shown in FIGS. 11-61 (Y) and 11-61 (Z), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at a volume of V2.

As shown in FIGS. 11-60 (W) and 11-60 (X), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are not activated. Light is emitted in a light emitting manner corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if it is the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern in the variable display, light is emitted in blue at brightness C2), and the background image is displayed based on the execution of the variable display again. Returns to the light emission mode according to the . Furthermore, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-62(a) and 11-62(b), when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, and the The pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIG. 11-63(c) to FIG. 11-67(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Further, during variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIG. 11-63(d) and FIG. 11-64(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figure 11-65 (g) to Figure 11-66 (j) reference).

As shown in FIG. 11-65(g) and FIG. 11-66(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are not connected to the decorative pattern. The light is emitted in a lighting mode corresponding to the temporary stop (for example, if it is the first temporary stop, it is blue at brightness C2, and if it is the second temporary stop, it is green at brightness C2), and the display is re-variable. Based on this, the light emission mode returns to the one corresponding to the background image. Although not shown in the feature section 135SG, when performing three pseudo-continuous effects during variable display, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacker The lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emitting manner (for example, red at brightness C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and emit light in accordance with the background image based on execution of variable display again. Return to aspect.

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 11-66 (j)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a late winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C2 and period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-68(m) and 11-68(n), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F once whites out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white), then the ready-to-reach effect is started. In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, thereby suggesting that a super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the whiteout timing, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect during the latter period, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

Also, at the whiteout timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y stop blinking at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0. . These main lamps 9a, frame lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, and movable lamps 9d remain off during the whiteout period, but after the whiteout ends, they emit light in a manner that corresponds to the reach effect. .

Further, during the whiteout period, output of variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and there is no sound, and from the timing when the whiteout ends, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, At the same time that the attacker lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d begin to emit light (lighting at brightness C1) in accordance with the reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R begin outputting the sound corresponding to the reach effect, which is the sound that corresponds to the reach effect. . In addition, as the sound corresponding to the reach effect in this feature section 135SG, BGM, etc., which is different from the sound corresponding to the variable display, must be output so that the player can recognize that the reach effect (super reach effect) is in progress. Bye.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 135SG, FIG. 11-28, FIG. 11-29(A) to FIG. 11-32(H), FIG. As shown in D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light before the display of the pending display is completed, making it easier for the player to recognize the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash effect. . Furthermore, it has a winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a first light emitting means in the present invention, and a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d as second light emitting means in the present invention. As shown in 11-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 during the execution period of the first winning flash effect, and at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T1 during the second period of winning flash effect. While blinking at T2, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d blink at brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first half, and at the time of winning in the second half. During the execution period of the flash effect, it flashes at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0, so during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, not only the winning flash lamp 135SG009F but also the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacker lamp 9c By blinking the movable lamp 9d at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1, it is possible to make the winning flash effect more prominent, so that the game can more easily recognize the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash effect. It has become.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, when a new starting winning occurs during the variable display, the holding memory based on the starting winning is subject to the execution or non-execution of the winning flash effect and the execution of the holding display preview effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, if a new starting winning occurs when the variable display is not being executed and there is no pending memory, the starting winning winning will be determined. It may be possible to determine whether or not to execute a flash effect at the time of winning and whether to execute a pending display notice effect based on the pending memory based on the above. Specifically, when a new starting prize occurs during the variable display, display pattern α to display pattern γ (pending display notice) are displayed in the active display area 135SG005A as specific display display start effect A or specific display display start effect B. After executing the appearance animation of the active display of either display pattern (display pattern in the case of non-execution of the effect or display pattern in the case of execution of the suspended display preview effect), the appearance animation of the active display is performed as a specific display rotation display effect. In addition to executing the rotating display, it is sufficient to execute the winning flash performance (early winning flash performance and later winning flash performance) based on the start of the variable display based on the starting winning.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-15, 11-30 (D) to 11-32 (H), and 11-49 (B) to 11-50 (D), the specific display display start effect is The part where the appearance animation in which the hold display gradually appears from the bottom to the top is displayed, and Figure 11-15, Figure 11-30 (D) to Figure 11-32 (H), Figure 11-49 (B) to Figure 11 As shown in -50 (D), it consists of a pending display and a rotating animation, and as shown in Figures 11-19 and 11-20, from the timing when the pending display appearance animation is completed. , since the rotating animation of the hold display is started, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the hold display.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-29 (A) to 11-32 (H), when performing specific display display start effect B, as a winning flash effect from a timing before the display start of the pending display. Since the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light when winning a prize, it is possible to make the flash performance more prominent when winning a prize. Furthermore, in this feature section 135SG, even when executing the specific display display start effect A shown in FIGS. 11-49(A) to 11-50(D), the winning flash effect is started from the timing before the display start of the pending display. Since the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning can be made more conspicuous.

In addition, the execution period of specific display display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the execution period of specific display display start effect B is 1.2 seconds. As shown in FIG. 11-50(D), since the winning flash effect starts before the end timing of the specific display display start effect A, the display pattern of the pending display is either one of display patterns α to display patterns γ. Even if the winning flash performance is started before the specific display display start performance ends, the player can surely recognize the pending display that is the object of the winning flash performance.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-28, Figure 11-29 (A), Figure 11-29 (B), Figure 11-49 (A), and Figure 11-49 (B), when winning a prize based on the starting prize. When it is decided to execute the flash effect, the player can start the flash effect by turning off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d. Recognizable.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are turned off once. Although the present invention is not limited to this, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame The lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d are set to emit light at a lower brightness than the previous brightness (for example, if the light was emitted at the brightness C2 up to then, the brightness C3 is lower than the brightness C2). It may be changed. In other words, the "low brightness state" in the present invention includes a state in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d are emitting light at low brightness, as well as a state in which they are turned off. It also includes a state in which the light is on (a state in which no light is emitted).

Also, as shown in Figures 11-29(A) to 11-48(n) and Figures 11-49(A) to 11-68(n), during variable display, a preview effect is being executed. It is possible to execute the flash effect at the time of winning and when it is not in progress, and the speakers 8L and 8R execute the flash effect at the time of winning while the variable display is being executed, as shown in Figure 11-29 (B). When doing so, the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2), and when the winning flash effect is executed while the preview effect is being executed, The sound corresponding to the preview performance is outputted at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is outputted at the volume V1 (V1>V2). Therefore, even if the speakers 8L and 8R are outputting the sound corresponding to the variable display and the sound corresponding to the preview effect, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning can be outputted so that the player can easily hear the flash effect at the time of winning. By outputting a corresponding sound, a player can easily recognize the execution of a flash performance when winning a prize.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is set to the volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R, so that the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body. , and the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at volume V2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output as the sound corresponding to the preview effect. As a form of outputting the sound with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display and the winning flash effect, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at a lower volume than the volume V2. (For example, it may be output at volume V3).

Further, in this feature section 135SG, a mode has been exemplified in which the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the preview effect or the sound corresponding to the variable display body, but the present invention is not limited to this. When winning a prize, it is not necessary to output the sound corresponding to the flash effect with priority over the sound corresponding to the preview effect or the sound corresponding to the variable display. Specifically, if the preview effect is started while the winning flash effect is being executed (while outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect or the sound corresponding to the strange display from speakers 8L and 8R), the winning effect from speakers 8L and 8R will start. It is also possible to temporarily stop the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect and output only the sound corresponding to the variable display and the sound corresponding to the preview effect, or only one of the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest due to the player having difficulty in hearing the sound corresponding to the preview effect or the sound corresponding to the variable display due to the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-28, 11-29 (A) to 11-32 (H), and 11-49 (A) to 11-50 (D), when winning a prize according to the starting prize. When it is decided to execute the flash effect, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is started from the speakers 8L and 8R, and then the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. Therefore, by outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is possible to quickly make the player aware that a starting winning has occurred and that the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. can.

In addition, this feature section 135SG exemplifies a form in which after the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started, and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the appearance animation of the pending display start. You can do it like this.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-28, during the execution period of the first period winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C1, and during the second period winning flash effect, the winning moment flash By flashing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at a brightness of C2 (C1>C2), at least the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be made to flash at a brightness of C1 to make the player aware of the start of the winning flash effect. It is possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from blinking at the brightness C1 even during the execution period of the later winning flash performance, which obstructs other performances and reduces game interest.

In this feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C1 and cycle T2 as the first period winning flash effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked as the second period winning flash effect. As an example of a "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis", a mode is shown in which the light is blinked at a luminance C2 lower than the luminance C1 and at a cycle T2 that is longer than the cycle T1. In other words, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash performance of the feature section 135SG is a low-speed blinking mode where the degree of emphasis is low due to the slow blinking speed (long blinking cycle). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes both a low brightness mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to low brightness, and the present invention is not limited to this. The "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the lamp 135SG009F may be only one of the low-speed blinking mode and the low-intensity mode.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-28, the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the second half is the period during which the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, and the period in which the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before and after the start of the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, It becomes easier for the player to recognize that the display is variable, and the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-28, during the execution period of the first-term winning flash effect, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the second-term winning flash effect, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S, the effect image 135SG005E can be displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the winning flash effect in the previous period, so that the player can recognize the start of the winning flash effect. During the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the second half, by displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 continues to display the effect image 135SG005E, which obstructs other displays and reduces the enjoyment of the game. can be suppressed from decreasing.

In particular, in this feature part 135SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-30 (D) to 11-31 (F), and 11-34 (L), the effect image 135SG005E is brighter than the silhouette image 135SG005S Since it is displayed in color and the display area on the image display device 5 is wide, the display of the effect image 135SG005E allows the player to effectively recognize the start of the winning flash effect.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. Now, a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8l and 8R at a volume of V2 (V1>V2). In this way, by outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at the volume V1 as the winning flash effect, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize that the winning flash effect has started. At the same time, during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at the volume V2, thereby preventing a decrease in gaming interest due to other effects being obstructed by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. It can be suppressed.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, while the flash effect at the time of winning a prize is being executed in the latter half, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is outputted at the volume V2, so that other effects are obstructed by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the present invention is exemplified as a form of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest, the present invention is not limited to this, and by not outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect while the later winning flash effect is being executed, other effects may be suppressed when winning a prize. It may also be possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to interference by the sound corresponding to the flash effect.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-29(A) to 11-48(n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the second half, before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize starts. During the symbol confirmation period of the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink, that is, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the symbol confirmation command has been received (the confirmation command reception flag has been set) or not. Regardless of whether the display time timer has timed out or not, the player can be controlled into a jackpot gaming state by continuing to flash the winning flash lamp 135SG009F during the symbol confirmation period. The feeling of anticipation can be maintained accurately until the start of the variable display which is the object of the flash effect when winning a prize, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, as a flash performance at the time of winning in the first period, the lamp for the winning flash 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set in a mode (brightness) according to the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period. C1 and period T1), and after the end of the first period winning flash performance, as the second period winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set in a mode (brightness C2 and cycle T2) according to the second period winning flash performance. ), while the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are emitted in a manner corresponding to the background image (brightness C2 and period T0), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 clears the process timer for the first period winning flash performance at the timing when the first period winning flash performance ends, so that the process timer for the first period winning flash performance is cleared during the execution period of the second period winning flash performance. It may be possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d from emitting light in a manner corresponding to the previous winning flash performance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3, a small pattern 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 11-33 (J), the pattern is confirmed. During the period, the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed with variable display stopped, so even if the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to emit light during the pattern confirmation period, the small pattern 135SG005M will be derived in combination to indicate a win. Since it is displayed, the player can be made aware that the symbol confirmation period is in progress.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-33 (J), while the winning flash effect is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small Since the symbol 135SG005M is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed overlappingly with the small symbol 135SG005M, making it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display. You can prevent it from getting stowed away.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, it is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect that includes temporary stopping and variable display of decorative symbols again on the image display device 5 during variable display, and variable display during execution of the winning flash effect. In the case where a pseudo continuous effect is executed, when the decorative pattern temporarily stops, a special symbol stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C (see Figure 11-40, etc.) Silhouette as a flash effect at the time of winning Since the images 135SG005S can be displayed overlappingly, the special symbol is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S, giving the player a sense of surprise and increasing his enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-42(a) to 11-47(l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display that is the subject of the flash effect when winning a prize. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the object of the flash effect when winning a prize, and it is possible to improve the interest of the variable display that is the object of the flash effect when winning.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-28, during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect. While the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off at the start timing, as shown in FIG. 11-22, due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the performance control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win performance of the variable display of the performance target. If this is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (timing at which the symbol confirmation command is received), which is a timing later than the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect, a second-term winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is performed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect does not end at the timing of the start of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-22, if the performance control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-reach performance of the variable display of the performance target due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the performance control CPU 120 Since the late winning flash performance is ended based on receiving the command, it is possible to further reduce the sense of discomfort when ending the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash performance.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-21, if a winning start occurs at the first starting opening while the super reach reach effect is being executed, the execution of the winning flash effect is not determined, so the super reach reach effect is executed. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-17, in this feature section 135SG, the pending display and active display can be displayed in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ with different jackpot expectations, and as shown in FIG. As shown, when it is decided to display the hold display or active display in the display pattern β or display pattern γ, the starting gate lamp 135SG009S flashes the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash effect or the game effect. Regardless of the lighting mode of the lamp 9, etc., the light is emitted in the color corresponding to the display pattern β or display pattern γ from the occurrence of a starting winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning, so the player can see the pending display or the active display. Since the display mode can also be recognized by the light emission mode (emission color) of the starting port lamp 135SG009S, the game enjoyment can be improved.

Although the characteristic parts of the present invention have been explained above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic parts, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

For example, although the flash effect at the time of late winning in the feature section 135SG is executed regardless of whether or not it is during the symbol confirmation period (while the variable display is stopped), the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in Figures 11-69 to 11-89 as a modified example 135SG-1, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect as the winning flash effect in the later period, the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the silhouette. The display of the image 135SG005S, etc. may not be executed during the symbol confirmation period.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-69 and FIG. 11-70 (A), while variable display is being executed, the image display device 5 executes variable display of decorative patterns, and the speakers 8L and 8R , the variable display compatible sound is output at volume V2. In addition, while the variable display is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (Figures 11-27 (A) to 11-27 (Blinking in the manner shown in (D)) is controlled.

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the preview performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R are displaying the image of the preview performance. A sound corresponding to the performance pattern (sound corresponding to the preview performance) is output at volume V2. Further, as the pending memory, there are three first special figure pending memories (three pending displays are displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D).

If a prize is won in the first starting slot (starting prize) during such a variable display, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the figure As shown in FIG. 11-69 and FIG. 11-70 (B), a flash effect is started at the time of first-term winning.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-69 and 11-70 (B), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 (V1>V2) for the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-69, 11-71(C), and 11-71(D), the display of the effect image 135SG005E starts from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the first period winning flash effect is started, as shown in Figure 11-71 (D), Figure 11-72 (E), and Figure 11-72 (F), as the above-mentioned specific display display start effect B. , An animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. After the character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed (the fourth position in the case of this modification 135SG-1). An animation of attacking (acting on) the position where the pending display is displayed is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending storage display area 135SG005D, the pending display that is the target of the winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) that is currently being executed appears gradually from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A acted. An appearance animation is displayed (see Figures 11-20 (D-1) to 11-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display whose appearance animation has been completed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display as a specific display rotating display effect like other pending displays.

In other words, in this modification 135SG-1, if a starting prize occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, then the display of the pending display based on the starting winning is completed. First, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. In addition, the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) that accompanies the execution of the specific display display start effect B in this modification 135SG-1 is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the second period (Fig. 11-73 (G) and (See Figure 11-73(H)).

When the first-term winning flash performance ends, the second-term winning flash performance starts from the end timing. As for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half, as shown in Figure 11-69, Figure 11-73 (G) and Figure 11-73 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and period T2 (period T2>period T1), and the brightness C2 and the period T2 of the gaming effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y. Blinking (blinking in the manner shown in FIGS. 11-27(A) to 11-27(D)), every fixed period of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. starts to be displayed.

Note that the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T2 is in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) A gradation using blue-based colors, a gradation using red-based colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.) is executed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1, but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (lamp blinking cycle length: T0>T2). >T1). Incidentally, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the latter half, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-74(I) and 11-74(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the transparent black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed over the entire area of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIG. 11-74 (J), FIG. 11-75 (K), and FIG. 11-75 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the image display device 5 displays decorative symbols and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. As shown in FIGS. 11-69, 11-76 (M), and 11-76 (N), during the symbol confirmation period from the end timing of the variable display to the start timing of the next variable display, the late The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the winning flash effect and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are stopped, and the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable The body lamp 9d continues to blink only in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the pending display displayed at the beginning in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display, and is also displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted to the right one by one. Furthermore, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 11-75 (K) to 11-82 (Z), in the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the speaker 8L, which is the flash performance during the latter period, While the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at the volume V2, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed, During the symbol confirmation period, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect during the latter period, the brightness of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at C2 and the blinking period T2, and the image display. The silhouette image 135SG005S is never displayed on the device 5.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-79 (S) to 11-81 (X), in the variable display where the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 11-81 ( See W). In this modified example 135SG-1, decorative symbols indicating normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a special symbol indicating the temporary stop is placed in the inner decorative symbol display area 5C. (temporarily stops), as the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, the brightness of the lamp 135SG009F for the winning flash at the time of winning, blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display. Display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the device 5 is executed.

In addition, in Figure 11-81 (W), while the winning flash effect is being executed, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash effect is The brightness C2 and cycle T2 of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F are not executed, but depending on the timing of the temporary stop, the brightness C2 and cycle T2 of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may vary depending on the timing of the temporary stop. Flashing is now performed. That is, in this modification 135SG-1, for the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the winning flash performance is continuously executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-82 (Y) and 11-82 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is off due to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the decorative patterns and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in the present feature section 135SG is also executed during the symbol determination period of the variable display when the normal reach is off. That is, as shown in FIGS. 11-82 (Y) and 11-82 (Z), even during the symbol determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at a volume of V2.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-81 (W) and 11-81 (X), during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop. Therefore, the player can recognize that the variable display has not ended yet by visually recognizing the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-83(a) and 11-83(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, and the The pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIG. 11-84(c) to FIG. 11-88(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Further, during variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIG. 11-84(d) and FIG. 11-85(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figure 11-86 (g) to Figure 11-87 (j) reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 11-87 (j)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as the latter winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is outputted at the volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-89(m) and 11-89(n), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F once whites out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white), then the ready-to-reach effect is started. In addition, in this modification 135SG-1, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, which suggests that the super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the whiteout timing, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends. On the other hand, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 except the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T0 are continued.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-69, if a starting prize occurs during the execution of the variable display, and it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect based on the starting winning, the corresponding starting entrance lamp lighting effect will be displayed. From the timing of the starting winning, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes the color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, blue when the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern β, and the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern γ). (in red) to start emitting light.

The light emission of the starting port lamp 135SG009S is a performance that is executed completely independently of the above-mentioned winning flash performance, and regardless of the blinking mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F or the game effect lamp 9, the above-mentioned starting Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice performance is continued from the time of winning to the end of the target variable display of the starting opening lamp light emission performance (target variable display of the flash performance at the time of winning).

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-1, when the winning flash effect is started based on the starting winning, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is stopped as a late winning flash effect during the symbol confirmation period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the variable display is in progress due to the winning flash lamp 135SG009F being lit continuously during the pattern confirmation period as a flash effect at the time of winning in the later period. ing. Furthermore, during the period of temporary suspension of the decorative symbols in the variable display that are the target of the winning flash performance, and during the temporary suspension period of the decorative symbols of the variable display that are the subject of the winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is activated. By continuing to blink at the brightness C2 and the period T2, it is possible to prevent the game from mistakenly assuming that the variable display has ended even though the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop period.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-1, during the pattern confirmation period during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash effect at the time of winning the winning flash 135SG009F, and the silhouette. Although a mode in which the display of image 135SG005S is stopped is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is possible to prevent the erroneous recognition that this is the case, output the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, turn on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F for the later winning flash effect, or display the silhouette image 135SG005S. Alternatively, only two may be executed.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-1, during the pattern confirmation period during the execution period of the late winning flash performance, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash performance as the late winning flash performance, the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the silhouette. Although the embodiment in which the display of image 135SG005S, etc. is not executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning flash as a late winning flash effect during the pattern confirmation period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may receive a symbol confirmation command during execution of the flash performance when winning a prize in the second half. Based on this, by clearing the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, during the pattern confirmation period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the time of winning is output as the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period, the light emission of the lamp 135SG009F for flash at the time of winning, The silhouette image 135SG005S may not be displayed.

In this case, based on the reception of the first variable display start command, the performance control CP 120 selects the flash performance process table for later prize winnings and resets and starts the process timer for the flash performance for late prize winnings. By doing this, it is only necessary to start the flash effect at the time of winning (the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S) in response to the start of the new variable display.

In addition, as a form in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F does not emit light as the late winning flash performance during the symbol confirmation period during the execution period of the latter winning flash performance, for example, the performance control CPU 120 may Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command during execution of the performance, the lighting control data for the flash performance lamp 135SG009F for the winning flash is sent to the lamp control board 14 instead of the lighting control data according to the process data of the process timer for the flash performance during the latter period. Lighting control data that maintains the lights off (for example, "0:0:0" indicating lights off as the RGB value of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F) may be output continuously until the variable display start command is received. .

In addition, if you do not execute the flash effect at the time of winning during the symbol confirmation period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning will be output from the start timing of the new variable display, the lighting of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning time will be turned on, and the silhouette image will be displayed. The display of 135SG005S may be re-executed from the beginning of each cycle (see Figure 11-69), or from the start timing of the new variable display, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect may be output, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be turned on, The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be restarted from the middle of each cycle.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-1, if the variable display ends during the execution of the flash performance at the time of late winning, during the symbol determination period of the variable display, the flash performance from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash performance at the time of late winning While stopping the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect when winning a prize and the display of the silhouette image 235SG005S, it also stops the output of the flash effect compatible sound and the display of the silhouette image 235SG005S. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d will continue to flash in this manner, but the present invention is not limited to this. Blinking may also be stopped. In particular, as a form of stopping the blinking of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d during the symbol confirmation period, the in-lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are stopped during the pattern confirmation period. The body lamp 9d may be turned off, or the in-lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d may be set to a certain color (for example, the background displayed on the image display device 5) during the pattern determination period. It may also be maintained in a continuously lit state (in a color corresponding to the image).

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, in the explanation of FIG. 11-8, it is stated that a plurality of reach effects may be provided as the super reach effect. If you set up a reach effect, make the jackpot expectation different between the reach effects of multiple super reach (for example, as a reach effect of super reach, the reach effect of super reach α and the reach effect of super reach α are different) It is also possible to provide a reach effect with a high super reach β.

In particular, when it is possible to execute reach effects of multiple super reaches with different jackpot expectations, as shown in FIGS. 11-90(A) and 11-90(B) as modification 135SG-2. , the movable body 32 can be moved between a retracted position (for example, a position above the image display device 5) and a presentation position (for example, a central front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5), and a flash presentation when winning a prize. If the target variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach α (a variable display that executes a reach effect of super reach α), the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 during the variable display is By repeatedly moving the movable body 32 between the retracted position and the retracted position (for example, the intermediate position between the retracted position and the production position described above) during the period in which the first display area 135SG005F except for the first display area 135SG005F is once white-out, the movable body 32 Execute a moving body motion suggestion performance that suggests moving to the performance position, and when winning a prize, the variable display that is the target of the flash performance will be a variable display with a variation pattern of Super Reach β (Execute the reach performance of Super Reach β) (variable display), the movable body 32 is further evacuated after the above-described movable body motion suggestion effect is executed during a period in which the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is once whited out. A movable body motion performance may be performed in which the moving body is moved from a position to a performance position.

By doing this, during the whiteout period, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the movement of the movable body 32, and when the movable body 32 moves to the performance position (when the movable body movement performance is executed) Since the player can be informed that the movable body motion performance will execute the reach performance of super reach β, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the reach performance of super reach α, the game enjoyment can be improved.

For example, if the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach α, as shown in Figures 11-91 (A) and 11-91 (B), When the variable display starts, output of sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R starts. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Further, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIG. 11-91(B), FIG. 11-92(C), and FIG. 11-92(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figures 11-93 (E) to 11-94 (H) reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 11-94 (H)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a later winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is outputted at the volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-95(I) to 11-96(L), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F temporarily becomes white-out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white). In addition, in this modification 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, which suggests that the super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 11-90(A) and FIG. 11-96(K) to FIG. 11-97(N), during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F The lighting at the brightness C2 and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are completed. Then, as a movable body motion suggestion performance, a movable body motion suggestion performance is performed based on the movable body 32 repeatedly reciprocating between the retreat position and the suggested position a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modified example 135SG-2) by a drive mechanism (not shown). When the pandemic ends, the whiteout period also ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion performance, the output of the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. Note that the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect may be a sound effect that allows the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retreat position and the suggested position (for example, a sound effect such as "rattle"). ) etc. can be output.

As shown in FIG. 11-90(A), FIG. 11-98(O), and FIG. 11-98(P), from the timing when the movable body motion suggestion presentation and whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 At the same time as the reach effect of reach α starts, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, and winning flash lamp 135SG009F start lighting with brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the reach effect. Then, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting a reach effect compatible sound (such as BGM different from the variable display compatible sound) corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach α.

In addition, if the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach β, as shown in Figure 11-99 (A) and Figure 11-99 (B), the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach β. When the variable display starts, output of sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R starts. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Further, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIG. 11-99(B), FIG. 11-100(C), and FIG. 11-100(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figures 11-101 (E) to 11-102 (H) reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 11-102 (H)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a later winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is outputted at the volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-103 (I) to 11-104 (L), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F temporarily becomes white-out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white). In addition, in this modification 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, which suggests that the super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 11-90(B) and FIG. 11-104(K) to FIG. 11-105(N), during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is The lighting at the brightness C2 and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are completed. Then, as a movable body motion suggestion production, the movable body motion is suggested based on the movable body 32 repeatedly reciprocating between the retreat position and the suggested position a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2) by a drive mechanism (not shown). The performance ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion performance, the output of the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. Note that the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect may be a sound effect that allows the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retreat position and the suggested position (for example, a sound effect such as "rattle"). ) etc. can be output.

After the movable body motion suggestion production ends, the whiteout period ends and the movable body motion production begins, as shown in Figure 11-90 (B) and Figures 11-106 (O) to 11-106 (P). As a result, the movable body 32 is moved from the retracted position to the presentation position by a drive mechanism (not shown). In addition, during the period of the movable body movement performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are set to brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the movable body movement performance. Light. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 11-90(B), the speakers 8L and 8R output sound corresponding to the moving body motion effect at the volume V1 (see FIG. 11-106(P)). Note that, as the sound corresponding to the movable body movement effect in the feature section 135SG, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "Zudoon") that allows the player to recognize that the movable body has moved may be output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-107(Q), the movable body motion performance ends based on the movable body 32 returning from the performance position to the retracted position. As shown in FIG. 11-90(B), FIG. 11-107(Q), and FIG. 11-107(R), from the timing when the movable body motion effect and whiteout are finished, the image display device 5 displays super reach. At the same time as the reach effect of β starts, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F start to light up at a brightness C1 corresponding to the reach effect. , the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting sound corresponding to the reach effect corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach β. In addition, as for the reach effect sound corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach β, the sound corresponding to the variable display and the reach effect of Super Reach α are available so that the player can recognize that the reach effect of Super Reach β is in progress. It is sufficient to output BGM or the like that is different from the reach performance compatible sound corresponding to the performance.

As described above, in the present modified example 135SG-2, in the variable display of super reach, which is the target of the winning flash effect, before the start of the super reach reach effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set to brightness C2 and cycle T2. From the start timing of the super reach effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up at a brightness of C2. In other words, when the reach effect starts, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up at a brightness of C2 and Instead of blinking at the period T2, the light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-reach effect (lighting up at a brightness of C2), so the game enjoyment of the ready-to-reach effect can be improved.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 11-96(K) to 11-98(O) and FIGS. 11-104(K) to 11-106(O), the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (whiteout). At the same time, during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at brightness C2 from the start timing of the Super Reach reach effect. Since it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to a change in the light emission mode of the lamp 135SG009F, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if the variable display that is the target of the flash effect when winning a prize is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach β, the movable body movement suggestion effect will be executed during the whiteout period, and the movable body movement suggestion effect will be executed. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off in response to the execution of , and then, in response to the execution of the movable body movement effect (movement of the movable body 32 to the effect position), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set to the movable body movement effect. It lights up at brightness C1 in a corresponding manner. In other words, since the lighting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning a prize is turned on at a brightness of C1 after turning off due to the execution of the movable object motion suggestion effect, it is important to note that these changes in the lighting mode may give a sense of discomfort to the player. Since it can be prevented, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, in the feature section 135SG, a form in which a dialogue preview performance can be executed as a preview performance suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot during variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , as modification example 135SG-3, the preview performance includes, in addition to the speech preview performance, the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes step by step, and a jackpot is expected according to the final number of change stages. It may be possible to perform a step-up effect with different degrees, a group preview effect in which a plurality of characters cross the image display device 5, or the like.

In particular, when it is possible to perform a step-up effect as the modified example 135SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 11-108 (A), 11-109 (A) to 11-113 (L), when winning When executing a step-up effect during a variable display in which a flash effect is not being executed, the timing for displaying an image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 or the timing for changing the image in stages is determined for the winning flash. The effect of the step-up performance may be enhanced by temporarily lighting the lamp 135SG009F at a brightness of C2. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-108(B) and FIG. 11-114(A) to FIG. 11-118(F), the step-up effect is executed during the variable display where the winning flash effect is being executed. At this time, since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has already been flashed at the brightness C2 and the period T2, the timing for displaying the image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 and the image are changed step by step. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not turned on at the right timing. In other words, while the winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is already emitting light in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect, is turned on in response to the step-up effect. In some embodiments, the light may not be emitted.

As described above, in the present modification example 135SG-3, when the step-up effect is started in the variable display during execution of the winning flash effect, that is, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has already been set to the brightness C2 as the winning flash effect. In addition, if a step-up effect that lights up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F while it is blinking at cycle T2 is started, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from starting at an inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the winning flash performance in a manner corresponding to the step-up performance.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, the movable body 32 is not operated before the start of the super reach reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and before the start of the super reach reach effect. In this case, it is possible to perform a movable body movement performance in which the movable body 32 is moved from a retracted position (for example, a position above the image display device 5) to a performance position (for example, a center front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5). By doing so, it may be possible to notify the player that the super reach effect will be executed.

In this way, if it is possible to execute the movable body motion performance before the reach performance of super reach, as shown in FIGS. 11-119(A) and 11-119(B) as modification 135SG-4, When the winning flash effect is executed for the variable display of the super reach, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect. The expected level of jackpot may be made to differ depending on which light emission mode is changed depending on the reach performance of the super reach.

For example, as shown in Figure 11-119(C), if the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is a jackpot, at the start of the variable display, the movable body From the start timing of the movement performance, it was decided to change the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect, and the reach effect started at a rate of 30%. From the timing, it is decided to change the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach effect. If the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is a loss, at the start of the variable display, from the movable body movement effect start timing, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F It has been decided to change the lighting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect, and at a rate of 70%, from the start timing of the reach effect, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. It is decided to change the light emission mode from a mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to a light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect.

In addition, if it is decided to change the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect or the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach effect, the said decision. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be controlled in accordance with the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer in accordance with the progress of the variable display.

As described above, in this modification example 135SG-4, depending on the timing of ending the light emitting mode according to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, it is possible to determine whether the flash is in progress during the execution period of the movable body movement effect or when the super In some cases, it may be during the execution period of the reach effect of Reach, so it is necessary to check whether the flash effect at the time of winning will end during the execution period of the moving body movement effect or during the execution period of the reach effect of Super Reach. It can be easily recognized by people. In particular, as shown in FIG. 11-119(C), the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the start timing of the movable body motion performance to the corresponding movable body motion performance. Since the expectation level of a jackpot is different depending on whether the flash mode is set according to the start timing of the reach effect or when the light emission mode is set according to the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash effect when winning a prize. This allows players to increase their interest in gaming.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-4, the timing at which the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends (changes to the light emission mode according to the movable body movement effect or the light emission mode according to the reach effect). Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game can be played according to the timing when the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends blinking as the winning flash effect. It may also be possible to suggest the setting values set in the device 1. By doing so, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the end timing of the winning flash effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-4, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light either at the start of the movable body movement performance during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance or at the start of the super reach reach performance. The mode can be changed, and the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body motion performance from the start timing of the movable body motion performance. Since the expectation level of a jackpot differs depending on the start timing of the reach effect and the lighting mode corresponding to the reach effect, the player pays attention to the effect that is executed at the timing when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the present modification example 135SG-4, in the variable display of super reach, a form in which a movable body movement performance can be executed before the start of the reach performance of super reach is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, before the execution of the movable body motion performance, a movable body motion suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the movable body motion performance may be made possible. In this way, when it is possible to execute the movable body motion suggestion effect before executing the movable body motion effect, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to suggest the movable body motion. A case is provided in which the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion display, and the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode according to the winning flash display to the movable body motion suggestion display. The jackpot expectation level may be different depending on the case where the light emission mode is set according to the movable body motion suggestion performance from the start timing and the case where the light emission mode is set according to the ready-to-reach performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance that is being executed when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this modified example 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement suggestion effect from the start timing of the movable body movement suggestion effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The light emission (blinking) of the time flash lamp 135SG009F is set to end at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and at the start timing of the reach effect. The expectation level of the jackpot may be set to differ depending on whether the game ends at . In this way, even when providing multiple timings for stopping the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect during the variable display of 1, the effect control CPU 120 may cause the winning flash to occur due to the generation of static electricity, etc. If it is not possible to stop the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, at the end timing of the variable display (timing of receiving the symbol confirmation command), which is a timing later than these timings, the late prize winning including the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be resumed. All you have to do is end the flash effect.

By doing this, even if the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash performance cannot be stopped at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion performance or the start timing of the reach performance, the winning flash performance will continue. At the end timing of the target variable display, it is possible to end the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half, including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, as display patterns of specific displays (pending display and active display), a display pattern α with the lowest jackpot expectation level is a white round shape, and a blue color with a jackpot expectation level higher than the display pattern α. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. As the display pattern, display patterns other than these display patterns α to γ may be provided.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-120 as modified example 135SG-5, the display pattern of the specific display includes, in addition to the above-mentioned display patterns α to display pattern γ, any one of the pending display or the active display. Display pattern δ, which is a round shape with blinking white, that may change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at the timing of (low expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ), as a pending display or active display The possibility of changing to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any timing during display is higher than display pattern δ (expectation level of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: high) A certain character-shaped circle A display pattern ε may be provided.

In other words, among display patterns α to γ of the pending display and active display in Modified Example 135SG-5, display pattern γ (red display) has the highest jackpot expectation, display pattern α (white display) ) is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, regarding the jackpot expectation of display pattern δ and display pattern ε when display pattern β and display pattern γ do not change, the jackpot expectation may be set lower than display pattern α, or lower than display pattern α. The jackpot expectation level may also be set to be higher than that of the display pattern β, and the jackpot expectation level may be set lower than that of the display pattern β.

Further, in the present modification example 135SG-5, the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, which may change to the display pattern β and the display pattern γ, are provided as the hold display and the active display display pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display pattern α is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display pattern α changes to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a lower rate than the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε. Furthermore, there may be a case where the display pattern β is changed to the display pattern γ for the pending display or active display.

Furthermore, the feature section 135SG determines whether or not to execute a pending display preview effect (a display in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in display pattern β or display pattern β) and the display pattern when determining whether to execute a flash effect when winning a prize. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. You may decide.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-120 as the above-mentioned modification 135SG-5, if it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning time, the display mode of the pending display or active display based on the starting winning is , the display pattern ε is determined at the highest rate, the display pattern δ is determined at a lower rate than the display pattern ε, the display pattern γ is determined at a lower rate than the display pattern δ, and the display pattern β is determined at a lower rate than the display pattern γ. It is sufficient to determine the display pattern α at a low ratio, and determine the display pattern α at the lowest ratio (determination ratio of the display pattern when deciding to execute the flash effect at the time of winning: display pattern ε > display pattern δ > display pattern γ > display pattern β > Display pattern α).

As mentioned above, display patterns α to display patterns ε are provided as display modes for specific displays (hold display and active display), and when a specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the specific display is displayed. Since there is a higher probability that the winning flash effect is executed at the same time than when pattern β or display pattern γ is displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to a specific display by executing the winning flash effect, and also to draw the player's attention to the specific display. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the display changes from the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the display pattern α is a display pattern in which a specific display is displayed in a white circle, the display pattern β is a display pattern in which a specific display is displayed in a blue circle, and the display pattern γ is a display pattern in which a specific display is displayed in a red circle. Since the display pattern δ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a blinking white circle, the player can easily identify the difference in the specific display by the display color or blinking mode.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, when a specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is changed to display pattern β or display depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is executed. Although the rate at which the pattern changes to pattern γ is not described, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, a flash effect is displayed at the time of winning. The rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to display pattern β or display pattern γ may vary depending on whether or not the specific display is being executed. By doing this, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. can.

In Modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ that blinks in white is exemplified as a special aspect of the specific display in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display in the present invention is not limited to this. The special mode (display pattern δ) may be a color other than white, blue, or red (for example, purple or black), which are the normal mode or special mode of the specific display in the present invention.

Further, in the present modification example 135SG-5, an example is given in which the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ to suggest that the specific display changes to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. The invention is not limited to this, but it may be possible to perform an action effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. .

In particular, in the case of an action presentation, multiple presentation modes (with different ratios of changing the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ) may be used as the presentation mode of the action presentation. For example, a first effect that can change a specific display displayed in display pattern δ to display pattern β or display pattern γ by acting on a specific display displayed in display pattern δ, and an effect that has a different presentation mode from the first effect and effect. A second effect effect is provided that can change the specific display to display pattern β or display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in display pattern δ. When the second effect is executed, the winning flash effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the first effect is executed.

By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the effect is executed as the first effect or the second effect. It is possible to increase expectations for what will be carried out in the action presentation.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the flash effect is executed at a higher rate when winning a prize than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ. Therefore, if a specific display is displayed in display pattern ε and a flash effect is executed at the time of winning, the player will be discouraged by the change in the display pattern of the specific display to display pattern β or display pattern γ. Since the player can draw attention to the player, the player's interest in playing the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the modification 135SG-5, a display pattern ε for displaying a character is provided as a display pattern for the specific display (suspended display and active display), and an action effect is executed for the character as the specific display. Although a form in which the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to display pattern β or display pattern γ is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible that the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on another character as a result of the effect.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 11-121 (A) and 11-121 (B), when the number of 1st special symbols reserved is 3 and is being displayed in a variable manner, a prize is entered in the 1st starting slot. (starting prize) occurs, and when the display pattern of the pending display based on the starting winning is determined to be the display pattern ε as a pending display preview effect based on the starting winning, the fourth block of the first pending storage display area 135SG005D An ally character is displayed as a pending display, and the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A changes to an enemy character (see FIG. 11-121 (B-1)).

In this state, the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, that is, as shown in FIGS. 11-122(A) and 11-122(B), When an ally character (suspended display of display pattern ε) moves from the display position of the fourth suspended display to the display position of the third suspended display, the ally character moves from the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. Act (shoot) against.

Then, each time the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, that is, as shown in FIGS. 11-122(C) and 11-122(D), When the ally character displayed in the first hold memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third hold display to the display position of the second hold display, the ally character displayed in the first hold memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third hold display to the display position of the second hold display. When moving from the display position of the display to the display position of the first suspended display, the friendly character acts (shoots) at the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Furthermore, when the variable display ends and the variable display that is the target of the pending display preview effect starts, the ally character displayed at the display position of the first pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed as active. The player moves to area 135SG005A, and the ally character acts directly on the enemy character within the active display area 135SG005A (a battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is executed).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-123 (G) and 11-123 (H), if the ally character wins as a result of the battle performance, the ally character is displayed in the display pattern β or in the active display area 135SG005A. The display changes to active display of display pattern γ. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-123 (I) and 11-123 (J), if the ally character is defeated as a result of the battle performance, the enemy character or ally character is displayed in the display pattern in the active display area 135SG005A. Changes to active display of α.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-6, when displaying a pending display in display pattern ε, an ally character as a pending display in the display pattern ε defeats an enemy character in active display area 135SG005A, and the active display is performed. Although we have exemplified a form in which the ally character that has become ``can be changed to an active display in display pattern β or display pattern γ, the present invention is not limited to this, and when displaying a pending display in display pattern ε, By defeating the enemy character while the pending display is being displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D, the friendly character serving as the pending display may be changed to the pending display of display pattern β or display pattern γ.

In addition, when displaying a pending display in display pattern ε, when a winning flash effect is executed at the same time, the display pattern ε is displayed at a higher rate than when a winning flash effect is not executed. may be changeable to a pending display (or an active display) of display pattern β or display pattern γ. By doing this, not only can the player's attention be drawn to the battle result between the friendly character and the enemy character as a pending display of the display pattern ε, but also the winning flash effect can be executed while the battle is being executed. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether there is a player or not, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the modified example 135SG-5 and the modified example 135SG-6, the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε are added to the display patterns α to γ described in the feature section 135SG as display patterns for the hold display and the active display. , but when displaying a hold display or an active display using these display patterns δ or display pattern ε, it is the same as when displaying a hold display or an active display using display patterns α to display patterns γ. Then, specific display display start effect A or specific display display start effect B may be executed.

More specifically, when displaying a hold display or an active display in the display pattern δ, execute the specific display display start effect A (see Figure 11-19) in the same way as in the case of the display pattern α, and then display the hold display or active display. When displaying with display pattern ε, as in the case of display pattern β and display pattern γ, the specific display display start effect B (see Figure 11-20) or the period during which the display of pending display or active display is completed is specified. A specific display start effect that is longer than the display start effect A and shorter than the specific display start effect B may be executed. By doing this, when displaying a pending display or an active display in the display pattern δ or display pattern ε, similarly to the feature section 135SG, from a timing before the display of the pending display or active display is completed. , the player will be able to recognize the winning flash effect sound and the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

Further, in the feature section 135SG, as an example of a winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modification 135SG-7, the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 may be changeable in stages according to the progress of the winning flash effect.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-124 (A) and 11-124 (B), when the winning ( When a winning (starting prize) occurs and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, as shown in Figure 11-124(B), The performance begins.

First, as shown in FIG. 11-124(B), as for the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning starts from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (V1>V2). , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-125(C) and 11-125(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5, and the winning flash Blinking control of the lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the cycle T1 is started. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the first period winning flash effect is started, as shown in Figure 11-125 (D), Figure 11-126 (E), and Figure 11-126 (F), as the above-mentioned specific display display start effect B. , An animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. After the character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed (if it is the main characteristic part 135SG, the fourth pending display is displayed). An animation that attacks (acts on) the position where the display is displayed is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending storage display area 135SG005D, the pending display that is the target of the winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) that is currently being executed appears gradually from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A acted. An appearance animation is displayed (see Figures 11-20 (D-1) to 11-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display whose appearance animation has been completed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display as a specific display rotating display effect like other pending displays.

When the first-term winning flash performance ends, the second-term winning flash performance starts from the ending timing. As for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half, as shown in FIGS. 11-127 (G) and 11-127 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning starts from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2. , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2>cycle T1), and the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and cycle T2 (Figure 11- 27(A) to blinking in the manner shown in FIGS. 11-27(D)), the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals. Ru.

Note that the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T2 is in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) A gradation using blue-based colors, a gradation using red-based colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.) is executed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1, but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (lamp blinking cycle length: T0>T2). >T1). Incidentally, during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-128(I) and 11-128(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the transparent black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed over the entire area of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIG. 11-128 (J), FIG. 11-129 (K), and FIG. 11-129 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the image display device 5 displays decorative symbols and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late winning in this modification 135SG-7 is executed regardless of whether or not it is the symbol confirmation period. That is, as shown in FIG. 11-128 (J), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R are When winning a prize, a sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the pending display displayed at the beginning in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display, and is also displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted to the right one by one. Furthermore, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

In addition, in this variable display, as shown in FIG. 11-129(K) and FIG. 11-129(L), the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed together with the black image 135SG005B on the image display device 5 is larger than the previous variable display. may be displayed. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S larger than the previous variable display in this way, the silhouette image is displayed in an overlapping manner in the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIG. 11-130(M) and FIG. 11-130(N), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the decorative symbol and the small symbol 135SG005M are displayed in the combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5. At the same time, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Even during the symbol confirmation period, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 11-130(N), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly. In particular, the silhouette image 135SG005S is also displayed overlappingly with the active display area 135SG005A. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at a volume of V2.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, it is possible to display either of two silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes as the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and a large-sized silhouette can be displayed. When the image 135SG005S is displayed, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A are displayed in an overlapping manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the large-sized silhouette image 135SG005S The active display area 135SG005A may be displayed in an overlapping manner only when the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect is executed. By doing this, the player can easily recognize the variable display corresponding to the flash effect when winning, and the active display area 135SG005A, that is, the active display corresponding to the flash effect when winning, is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S. Therefore, it is possible to provide surprise to the players and improve their interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect when winning a prize, and depending on the size of the displayed silhouette image 135SG005S, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active Since the overlapping aspect with the display area 135SG005A is different, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, there are cases in which the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap and cases in which they do not overlap. , the present invention is not limited to this, but in the case where the overlapping area between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, when the active display area 135SG005A A case where only a part of the area 135SG005A overlaps with the silhouette image 135SG005S, a case where the entire active display area 135SG005A overlaps with the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc.) may be provided.

Further, in the present modification example 135SG-7, depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, there is a case where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap. However, before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts, it overlaps with the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect that is displayed in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D. The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap with the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A, which is the target of the winning flash effect, while the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is being executed. A silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed. By doing this, the player can easily recognize the pending display and active display that correspond to the flash effect when winning a prize, and the silhouette image 135SG005S hides not only the pending display but also the active display. It is possible to improve the game's interest by adding even more surprise to the game.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-7, only one of the pending display and the active display is hidden by displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which both the pending display and the active display are hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning.

Further, in the present modification 135SG-7, a form is exemplified in which the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed overlappingly in the active display area 135SG005A and the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the winning flash effect as exemplified in the feature section 135SG, when the decorative pattern temporarily stops, The silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect when winning a prize may be displayed overlappingly on the special symbol (see FIG. 11-40, etc.) that stops in the decorative symbol display area 5C. By doing this, the special symbol for notifying the temporary stop is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning, so it is possible to give surprise to the player and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, as a re-variable display effect of the present invention, a form in which the special symbol stops in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a re-variable display effect, an image different from the special symbol may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning may be displayed overlapping with this image.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, if a starting winning at the first starting opening occurs during execution of the super reach reach effect, execution of the winning flash effect based on the starting winning is not determined (determined to be non-executable). Although the present invention is not limited to this example, as a modified example 135SG-8, if a starting winning occurs in the first starting opening while the variable display is being executed, the variable display The remaining period may be specified, and if the specified period is less than the execution period of the winning flash effect in the previous period, execution of the winning flash effect may not be determined (determined not to be executed). By doing this, the winning flash effect (previous period winning flash effect) is executed when the remaining period of the variable display is shorter than the execution period of the previous winning flash effect. It is possible to prevent the specific display (pending display or active display) of the target of the performance from becoming difficult to understand.

In addition, in the present modification example 135SG-8, a mode is exemplified in which it is determined whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning a prize based on the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the flash effect when winning a prize depends on the remaining period of the variable display and the period other than the execution period of the flash effect when winning the previous period (for example, a period of 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) ) may be used as a criterion.

Furthermore, in this modification example 135SG-8, if a starting winning occurs at the first starting opening while the variable display is being executed, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. Although the embodiment is exemplified in which the execution of the winning flash effect is not determined if the specified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the winning flash effect, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, it may be possible to perform a winning flash effect from the start timing of the next variable display, provided that the variable display result of the variable display is a loss. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the super reach reach effect and the winning flash effect from becoming less interesting due to the overlap of the super reach effect and the winning flash effect.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect is blinking at a brightness C1 and a cycle T1 (the light emitting mode in the previous winning flash effect), and a blinking mode with a brightness C2 and a cycle T2. There are two light emission modes: flashing (light emission mode in the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half). On the other hand, the light emission mode of the starting port lamp 135SG009S in the starting port lamp lighting effect includes blue light emission at a brightness C2 according to the display pattern β, and red light emission at a brightness C2 according to the display pattern γ. It is provided. In other words, the feature section 135SG exemplifies a form in which the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect is the same as the number of light emission modes of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-9, the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect and the light emission of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp light emission effect are changed. The number of aspects may be different.

In particular, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-5, display patterns δ and display patterns ε are provided as display patterns for the hold display and active display, and these display patterns δ are used as the light emission mode of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission effect. By providing a light emitting mode according to the display pattern ε, the number of light emitting modes of the starting port lamp 135SG009S in the starting port lamp light emission effect can be set to be greater than the number of light emitting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect. good. By doing this, the variation in the light emission of the starting port lamp 135SG009S increases, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the feature section 135SG, an example is given in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to emit light as a winning flash effect, and the starting gate lamp 135SG009S is made to emit light in a starting door lamp light emission effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-10, the light emitting area where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as a winning flash effect may be set larger than the light emitting area where the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S emits light as a starting exit lamp light emitting performance. good.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-28, in the case where it is decided to execute both the winning flash effect and the pending display notice effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is activated when the starting winning occurs. On the other hand, the starting gate lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the reach effect on the variable display that is the target of the starting prize winning flash effect, while the starting gate lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the reach effect on the variable display that is the target of the starting winning flash effect. Since the light is emitted until the end of the variable display (which is the target of the flash effect), by applying the modified example 135SG-10, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will emit light in accordance with the winning flash effect for an excessively long time. It is possible to maintain the player's expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state by the light emitting mode of the starting port lamp 135SG009S while preventing a decrease in gaming interest due to the above.

In addition, in the characteristic part 135SG, a mode in which the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light without blinking is illustrated as the starting lamp lamp lighting effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starting lamp lamp 135SG009S is not limited to this. The mouth lamp 135SG009S may be blinked. Furthermore, when the starting port lamp 135SG009S is blinked as the starting port lamp light emission effect in this way, the blinking cycle of the starting port lamp 135SG009S is set to the blinking period (period T2) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect. It may be different. In this way, by making the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F different from the blinking cycle of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S, players pay attention to both the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the feature section 135SG has a mode in which the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, etc. are temporarily turned off when a flash effect is executed at the time of winning. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-11, when performing a flash effect at the time of winning, the brightness of the backlight etc. built in the image display device 5 is The winning flash effect may be started after the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered by lowering the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5. In this manner, when the winning flash effect is executed, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced to make it easier for the player to recognize the start of the winning flash effect.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-11, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight etc. built into the image display device 5, that is, the image display Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the image display device 5 is changed to a low visibility state in which visibility is lower than the previous state by changing the brightness of the device 5, the present invention is not limited to this. Forms of reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the display device 5 include, in addition to reducing the 5 luminance (brightness) of the image display device, temporarily stopping the display of the image on the image display device 5; The movable body 32 is moved in front of the image display device 5, the image display device 5 itself is moved repeatedly in the vertical direction, etc., and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is increased to relatively display the image on the image display device 5. It may also be something that reduces the visibility of the image being displayed.

In other words, a "low visibility state" in the present invention is a state in which the visibility on the image display device 5 is lower than the immediately previous state, and is defined as a state in which the visibility on the image display device 5 is lowered than the previous state. Contains images that reduce visibility.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 11-28, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect in response to a starting winning, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is started from the speakers 8L and 8R. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started after the winning flash is started.As a modified example 135SG-12, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts flashing in response to the starting winning. If it is decided to execute, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed. It's okay. By doing this, it is possible for the player to quickly recognize that a starting winning has occurred and that the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided by the blinking (light emission) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. You can improve your interest in gaming.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-12, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a hold display is displayed. An appearance animation of the active display may be started.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 11-28, during the execution period of the first period winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R output the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at the volume V1, The lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T1, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period, the volume of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R is executed. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the output at V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed, the present invention is limited to this. Rather, as a modified example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the second term, when the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning the award is started, it is the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term. , Outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect by the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C1 and cycle T1, and temporarily displaying the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5. You may. By doing this, even during the execution period of the flash performance when winning a prize in the second half, the sound corresponding to the flash performance when winning a prize is output at the volume V1 from speakers 8L and 8R, as in the flash performance when winning a prize in the first half, and the sound for the flash performance when winning a prize is output at volume V1. By flashing the lamp 135SG009F at a brightness C1 and a cycle T1 and displaying the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5, the player recognizes that the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect will start. Since it is easy to play, it can improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the second period winning flash effect, when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, the same as during the execution period of the first period winning flash effect, The speakers 8L and 8R temporarily output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, the flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the cycle T1 at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started during the execution period of the winning flash effect in the later period, the winning time flash effect by the speakers 8L and 8R is Execute only one or two of the following: outputting a sound compatible with flash effects at volume V1, blinking flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C1 and period T1 when winning a prize, and displaying effect image 135SG005E on image display device 5. You can do it like this.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 of this specification has a jackpot probability that differs depending on the set value (FIGS. 1 to 9), a pending display notice effect based on a starting win, and a flash effect at the time of winning. It is executable and the lighting mode changes as a winning flash effect depending on the lamp (characteristic section 135SG, Figures 11-1 to 11-68), and during the winning pattern determination period, the winning flash effect (Modified Example 135SG-1, Figures 11-69 to 11-89), it is possible to perform super reach reach performances with different jackpot expectations, and the movable body movement is performed before the reach production with high jackpot expectations. If the performance can be executed and the movable body movement performance is executed, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the start timing of the movable body movement performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement performance. (Modification 2, Figures 11-90 to 11-107), the step-up effect can be executed during variable display, and if the step-up effect is executed when the winning flash effect is not executed, the winning flash While the lamp 135SG009F for the winning flash emits light in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect, if the step-up effect is executed while the winning flash effect is being executed, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to the winning flash effect. One that does not change from the corresponding light emission mode (Modified Example 135SG-3, Figures 11-108 to 11-118), it is possible to perform a movable body movement performance before the start of the reach performance of Super Reach, and the lamp for flashing when winning a prize. When the light emitting mode of 135SG009F changes from the light emitting mode according to the flash effect when winning a prize to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect from the start timing of the movable body movement effect, and from the start timing of the reach effect to the light emitting mode according to the reach effect. The jackpot expectation level differs depending on the lighting mode (Modified Example 135SG-4, Figure 11-119), and display patterns α to ε are provided as display modes for pending display and active display. The rate of which display pattern is determined as the display pattern of the pending display or the active display is different depending on the execution of the winning flash effect due to winning a prize (Modification 135SG-5, Figure 11- 120), when the display pattern ε is determined as the display pattern of the hold display, the display pattern ε changes to any of the display patterns α to γ according to the execution of the action effect (Modification 135SG- 6, Fig. 11-121 to Fig. 11-123), the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes according to the progress of the flash effect at the time of winning (Modification 135SG-7, Fig. 11-124 to FIG. 11-130), etc., but the pachinko game machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining two or more of these plurality of characteristic parts and modifications. good.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game machine that plays a predetermined game is defined as a game machine that plays at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, it may be a slot machine or a general game machine as long as it performs the following.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
sound output means;
a display means;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
A light emitting means;
Equipped with
The effect execution means includes a specific display effect that displays a specific display corresponding to the variable display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a specific light emission effect that causes the light emitting means to emit light based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the specific display. It is possible to perform a performance and a performance different from the specific light emission performance, a specific performance that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an information performance that operates information display regarding the game,
The specific performance is
The display means displays a performance video, the sound output means outputs performance sound, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is announced as a performance result. including,
The performance execution means is
In the first period, it is possible to display the performance video in a performance mode that progresses at a first speed;
In the second period, it is possible to display the performance video in a performance mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed,
In both the first period and the second period, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the light emitting means, and in the second period, the light emitting means may be emitted at shorter intervals than in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode,
In the first period and the second period, the operation speed of the information display in the information presentation is not changed,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means,
The first light emitting means is configured to emit light during a first predetermined period from when the specific light emitting effect is started to a predetermined timing, and during a second predetermined period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. It emits light in a manner according to the specific lighting effect,
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner according to the specific light emission effect during the first predetermined period, and emits light in a manner according to the variable display being executed during the second predetermined period,
The effect execution means includes, as the specific display effect, a first specific display effect in which a time from the establishment of the predetermined condition to the completion of display of the specific display is a first time; A second specific display effect in which a time until the display is completed is a second time longer than the first time, and
The degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is different depending on when the first specific display effect is executed and when the second specific display effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images